US20060216309A1 - Identification of genes - Google Patents
Identification of genes Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20060216309A1 US20060216309A1 US11/199,853 US19985305A US2006216309A1 US 20060216309 A1 US20060216309 A1 US 20060216309A1 US 19985305 A US19985305 A US 19985305A US 2006216309 A1 US2006216309 A1 US 2006216309A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- dna
- gene
- canceled
- microorganism
- nucleic acid
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 108090000623 proteins and genes Proteins 0.000 title claims abstract description 265
- 244000005700 microbiome Species 0.000 claims abstract description 144
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 139
- 150000007523 nucleic acids Chemical class 0.000 claims abstract description 43
- 102000039446 nucleic acids Human genes 0.000 claims abstract description 39
- 108020004707 nucleic acids Proteins 0.000 claims abstract description 39
- 239000003550 marker Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 38
- 230000006978 adaptation Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 6
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 5
- 230000002779 inactivation Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 4
- 108020004414 DNA Proteins 0.000 claims description 183
- 241000293869 Salmonella enterica subsp. enterica serovar Typhimurium Species 0.000 claims description 78
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 claims description 62
- 108091034117 Oligonucleotide Proteins 0.000 claims description 55
- 241000894006 Bacteria Species 0.000 claims description 52
- 241001465754 Metazoa Species 0.000 claims description 48
- 241000607142 Salmonella Species 0.000 claims description 40
- 241000588724 Escherichia coli Species 0.000 claims description 37
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 claims description 36
- 108091028043 Nucleic acid sequence Proteins 0.000 claims description 26
- 201000010099 disease Diseases 0.000 claims description 20
- 208000037265 diseases, disorders, signs and symptoms Diseases 0.000 claims description 20
- 241000233866 Fungi Species 0.000 claims description 18
- 108090000765 processed proteins & peptides Proteins 0.000 claims description 17
- 210000000952 spleen Anatomy 0.000 claims description 17
- 241000699666 Mus <mouse, genus> Species 0.000 claims description 16
- 241000282414 Homo sapiens Species 0.000 claims description 14
- 229920001184 polypeptide Polymers 0.000 claims description 14
- 102000004196 processed proteins & peptides Human genes 0.000 claims description 14
- 230000001717 pathogenic effect Effects 0.000 claims description 9
- 241000191967 Staphylococcus aureus Species 0.000 claims description 6
- 230000000692 anti-sense effect Effects 0.000 claims description 6
- 241000607768 Shigella Species 0.000 claims description 5
- 241000607479 Yersinia pestis Species 0.000 claims description 5
- 241000228212 Aspergillus Species 0.000 claims description 4
- 241000700159 Rattus Species 0.000 claims description 4
- 241000193998 Streptococcus pneumoniae Species 0.000 claims description 4
- 239000000074 antisense oligonucleotide Substances 0.000 claims description 4
- 238000012230 antisense oligonucleotides Methods 0.000 claims description 4
- 229940031000 streptococcus pneumoniae Drugs 0.000 claims description 4
- 241000193155 Clostridium botulinum Species 0.000 claims description 3
- 239000003155 DNA primer Substances 0.000 claims description 3
- 241000283973 Oryctolagus cuniculus Species 0.000 claims description 3
- 238000004113 cell culture Methods 0.000 claims description 3
- 239000003937 drug carrier Substances 0.000 claims description 3
- 241000588832 Bordetella pertussis Species 0.000 claims description 2
- 241000589875 Campylobacter jejuni Species 0.000 claims description 2
- 241000282693 Cercopithecidae Species 0.000 claims description 2
- 201000007336 Cryptococcosis Diseases 0.000 claims description 2
- 241000221204 Cryptococcus neoformans Species 0.000 claims description 2
- 241000606768 Haemophilus influenzae Species 0.000 claims description 2
- 241000228404 Histoplasma capsulatum Species 0.000 claims description 2
- 241000589242 Legionella pneumophila Species 0.000 claims description 2
- 241000186781 Listeria Species 0.000 claims description 2
- 241000588652 Neisseria gonorrhoeae Species 0.000 claims description 2
- 241000588650 Neisseria meningitidis Species 0.000 claims description 2
- 241000193996 Streptococcus pyogenes Species 0.000 claims description 2
- 241000607598 Vibrio Species 0.000 claims description 2
- 241000606834 [Haemophilus] ducreyi Species 0.000 claims description 2
- 230000004544 DNA amplification Effects 0.000 claims 2
- 241000590002 Helicobacter pylori Species 0.000 claims 1
- 241000588747 Klebsiella pneumoniae Species 0.000 claims 1
- 241000009328 Perro Species 0.000 claims 1
- 241000589516 Pseudomonas Species 0.000 claims 1
- 229940047650 haemophilus influenzae Drugs 0.000 claims 1
- 229940037467 helicobacter pylori Drugs 0.000 claims 1
- 229940045505 klebsiella pneumoniae Drugs 0.000 claims 1
- 229940115932 legionella pneumophila Drugs 0.000 claims 1
- 102000053602 DNA Human genes 0.000 description 176
- 230000001018 virulence Effects 0.000 description 119
- 238000009396 hybridization Methods 0.000 description 52
- 210000004027 cell Anatomy 0.000 description 50
- 239000013612 plasmid Substances 0.000 description 46
- 239000012634 fragment Substances 0.000 description 41
- JLCPHMBAVCMARE-UHFFFAOYSA-N [3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-hydroxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methyl [5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)-2-(hydroxymethyl)oxolan-3-yl] hydrogen phosphate Polymers Cc1cn(C2CC(OP(O)(=O)OCC3OC(CC3OP(O)(=O)OCC3OC(CC3O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)C(COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3CO)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)O2)c(=O)[nH]c1=O JLCPHMBAVCMARE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 39
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 37
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 37
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 36
- 238000003752 polymerase chain reaction Methods 0.000 description 34
- 239000013615 primer Substances 0.000 description 33
- 241000699670 Mus sp. Species 0.000 description 29
- 208000015181 infectious disease Diseases 0.000 description 27
- 239000002054 inoculum Substances 0.000 description 27
- 239000013598 vector Substances 0.000 description 26
- 108091008146 restriction endonucleases Proteins 0.000 description 25
- 108700026244 Open Reading Frames Proteins 0.000 description 24
- 102000004169 proteins and genes Human genes 0.000 description 24
- 239000002773 nucleotide Substances 0.000 description 23
- 125000003729 nucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 description 23
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 22
- 230000035772 mutation Effects 0.000 description 21
- 230000001580 bacterial effect Effects 0.000 description 19
- 210000000349 chromosome Anatomy 0.000 description 17
- 238000007912 intraperitoneal administration Methods 0.000 description 17
- 229930027917 kanamycin Natural products 0.000 description 16
- 229960000318 kanamycin Drugs 0.000 description 16
- SBUJHOSQTJFQJX-NOAMYHISSA-N kanamycin Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CN)O[C@@H]1O[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O[C@@H]2[C@@H]([C@@H](N)[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O2)O)[C@H](N)C[C@@H]1N SBUJHOSQTJFQJX-NOAMYHISSA-N 0.000 description 16
- 229930182823 kanamycin A Natural products 0.000 description 16
- 241000196324 Embryophyta Species 0.000 description 15
- 230000010354 integration Effects 0.000 description 15
- 239000002609 medium Substances 0.000 description 15
- 235000021186 dishes Nutrition 0.000 description 14
- 125000003275 alpha amino acid group Chemical group 0.000 description 13
- 238000011081 inoculation Methods 0.000 description 13
- 231100000636 lethal dose Toxicity 0.000 description 13
- 238000002703 mutagenesis Methods 0.000 description 13
- 231100000350 mutagenesis Toxicity 0.000 description 13
- FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium chloride Chemical compound [Na+].[Cl-] FAPWRFPIFSIZLT-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 12
- 230000002238 attenuated effect Effects 0.000 description 12
- 230000003115 biocidal effect Effects 0.000 description 12
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 12
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 12
- 238000010171 animal model Methods 0.000 description 11
- 238000002474 experimental method Methods 0.000 description 11
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 description 11
- 244000000010 microbial pathogen Species 0.000 description 11
- 230000001105 regulatory effect Effects 0.000 description 11
- 238000012163 sequencing technique Methods 0.000 description 11
- 230000009466 transformation Effects 0.000 description 11
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 239000000017 hydrogel Substances 0.000 description 10
- 239000006166 lysate Substances 0.000 description 10
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 10
- 241000194032 Enterococcus faecalis Species 0.000 description 9
- 241000293871 Salmonella enterica subsp. enterica serovar Typhi Species 0.000 description 9
- 108010069584 Type III Secretion Systems Proteins 0.000 description 9
- 238000010367 cloning Methods 0.000 description 9
- 239000000499 gel Substances 0.000 description 9
- 108091008053 gene clusters Proteins 0.000 description 9
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 9
- 239000012528 membrane Substances 0.000 description 9
- 239000011780 sodium chloride Substances 0.000 description 9
- 229960005486 vaccine Drugs 0.000 description 9
- 240000004808 Saccharomyces cerevisiae Species 0.000 description 8
- 235000014680 Saccharomyces cerevisiae Nutrition 0.000 description 8
- RYYWUUFWQRZTIU-UHFFFAOYSA-N Thiophosphoric acid Chemical class OP(O)(S)=O RYYWUUFWQRZTIU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 8
- 244000052616 bacterial pathogen Species 0.000 description 8
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000029087 digestion Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000001727 in vivo Methods 0.000 description 8
- 230000017105 transposition Effects 0.000 description 8
- 241001225321 Aspergillus fumigatus Species 0.000 description 7
- 238000011725 BALB/c mouse Methods 0.000 description 7
- 102000004190 Enzymes Human genes 0.000 description 7
- 108090000790 Enzymes Proteins 0.000 description 7
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 7
- 239000013604 expression vector Substances 0.000 description 7
- 230000002068 genetic effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000001404 mediated effect Effects 0.000 description 7
- 210000004379 membrane Anatomy 0.000 description 7
- 229960000210 nalidixic acid Drugs 0.000 description 7
- MHWLWQUZZRMNGJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N nalidixic acid Chemical compound C1=C(C)N=C2N(CC)C=C(C(O)=O)C(=O)C2=C1 MHWLWQUZZRMNGJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 7
- 239000003298 DNA probe Substances 0.000 description 6
- LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethanol Chemical compound CCO LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycerine Chemical compound OCC(O)CO PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- TWRXJAOTZQYOKJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L Magnesium chloride Chemical compound [Mg+2].[Cl-].[Cl-] TWRXJAOTZQYOKJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 6
- 241000607762 Shigella flexneri Species 0.000 description 6
- 239000003242 anti bacterial agent Substances 0.000 description 6
- 239000004599 antimicrobial Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000002512 chemotherapy Methods 0.000 description 6
- RGWHQCVHVJXOKC-SHYZEUOFSA-J dCTP(4-) Chemical group O=C1N=C(N)C=CN1[C@@H]1O[C@H](COP([O-])(=O)OP([O-])(=O)OP([O-])([O-])=O)[C@@H](O)C1 RGWHQCVHVJXOKC-SHYZEUOFSA-J 0.000 description 6
- 238000006731 degradation reaction Methods 0.000 description 6
- 238000010790 dilution Methods 0.000 description 6
- 239000012895 dilution Substances 0.000 description 6
- 239000003814 drug Substances 0.000 description 6
- 210000002919 epithelial cell Anatomy 0.000 description 6
- 230000012010 growth Effects 0.000 description 6
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 241000894007 species Species 0.000 description 6
- 210000001519 tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 6
- 238000013518 transcription Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000035897 transcription Effects 0.000 description 6
- 229920001817 Agar Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 108020004705 Codon Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 241001646716 Escherichia coli K-12 Species 0.000 description 5
- 241000282412 Homo Species 0.000 description 5
- 241000405383 Salmonella enterica subsp. enterica serovar Typhimurium str. LT2 Species 0.000 description 5
- 239000008272 agar Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229960000723 ampicillin Drugs 0.000 description 5
- AVKUERGKIZMTKX-NJBDSQKTSA-N ampicillin Chemical compound C1([C@@H](N)C(=O)N[C@H]2[C@H]3SC([C@@H](N3C2=O)C(O)=O)(C)C)=CC=CC=C1 AVKUERGKIZMTKX-NJBDSQKTSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 230000027455 binding Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 description 5
- 238000010348 incorporation Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000005764 inhibitory process Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 5
- 239000008194 pharmaceutical composition Substances 0.000 description 5
- 150000008298 phosphoramidates Chemical class 0.000 description 5
- 238000007747 plating Methods 0.000 description 5
- 229920002477 rna polymer Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 238000012216 screening Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000010561 standard procedure Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000026683 transduction Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000010361 transduction Methods 0.000 description 5
- 241001167018 Aroa Species 0.000 description 4
- 241000124008 Mammalia Species 0.000 description 4
- 241000607734 Yersinia <bacteria> Species 0.000 description 4
- 239000011543 agarose gel Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000003321 amplification Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000002585 base Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000002744 homologous recombination Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000006801 homologous recombination Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000003112 inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000003199 nucleic acid amplification method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 244000052769 pathogen Species 0.000 description 4
- 230000035515 penetration Effects 0.000 description 4
- 101150053304 pykF gene Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 230000028327 secretion Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000035945 sensitivity Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000000725 suspension Substances 0.000 description 4
- 230000001225 therapeutic effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 101100376046 Bacillus subtilis (strain 168) ydhE gene Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 208000031729 Bacteremia Diseases 0.000 description 3
- LZZYPRNAOMGNLH-UHFFFAOYSA-M Cetrimonium bromide Chemical compound [Br-].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC[N+](C)(C)C LZZYPRNAOMGNLH-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 3
- 108091026890 Coding region Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 102000012410 DNA Ligases Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108010061982 DNA Ligases Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 238000001712 DNA sequencing Methods 0.000 description 3
- IAZDPXIOMUYVGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dimethylsulphoxide Chemical compound CS(C)=O IAZDPXIOMUYVGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 101100491986 Emericella nidulans (strain FGSC A4 / ATCC 38163 / CBS 112.46 / NRRL 194 / M139) aromA gene Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 101100183377 Escherichia coli (strain K12) mdtK gene Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 241000713772 Human immunodeficiency virus 1 Species 0.000 description 3
- 101710163270 Nuclease Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 239000004677 Nylon Substances 0.000 description 3
- 241000589517 Pseudomonas aeruginosa Species 0.000 description 3
- 241000607132 Salmonella enterica subsp. enterica serovar Gallinarum Species 0.000 description 3
- 241000701835 Salmonella virus P22 Species 0.000 description 3
- HEMHJVSKTPXQMS-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium hydroxide Chemical compound [OH-].[Na+] HEMHJVSKTPXQMS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 3
- 208000037386 Typhoid Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 239000002671 adjuvant Substances 0.000 description 3
- 101150037081 aroA gene Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 238000003556 assay Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000012512 characterization method Methods 0.000 description 3
- SUYVUBYJARFZHO-RRKCRQDMSA-N dATP Chemical compound C1=NC=2C(N)=NC=NC=2N1[C@H]1C[C@H](O)[C@@H](COP(O)(=O)OP(O)(=O)OP(O)(O)=O)O1 SUYVUBYJARFZHO-RRKCRQDMSA-N 0.000 description 3
- SUYVUBYJARFZHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N dATP Natural products C1=NC=2C(N)=NC=NC=2N1C1CC(O)C(COP(O)(=O)OP(O)(=O)OP(O)(O)=O)O1 SUYVUBYJARFZHO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- HAAZLUGHYHWQIW-KVQBGUIXSA-N dGTP Chemical compound C1=NC=2C(=O)NC(N)=NC=2N1[C@H]1C[C@H](O)[C@@H](COP(O)(=O)OP(O)(=O)OP(O)(O)=O)O1 HAAZLUGHYHWQIW-KVQBGUIXSA-N 0.000 description 3
- NHVNXKFIZYSCEB-XLPZGREQSA-N dTTP Chemical compound O=C1NC(=O)C(C)=CN1[C@@H]1O[C@H](COP(O)(=O)OP(O)(=O)OP(O)(O)=O)[C@@H](O)C1 NHVNXKFIZYSCEB-XLPZGREQSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000012217 deletion Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000037430 deletion Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000007924 injection Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000002347 injection Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000009545 invasion Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000002955 isolation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 210000004072 lung Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 210000002540 macrophage Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 229910001629 magnesium chloride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 3
- YACKEPLHDIMKIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N methylphosphonic acid Chemical class CP(O)(O)=O YACKEPLHDIMKIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229920001778 nylon Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 210000000056 organ Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 150000004713 phosphodiesters Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 229920001983 poloxamer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 230000005180 public health Effects 0.000 description 3
- 101150015622 pyk gene Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 230000010076 replication Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000003786 synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005382 thermal cycling Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000013519 translation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 201000008297 typhoid fever Diseases 0.000 description 3
- 241000272517 Anseriformes Species 0.000 description 2
- 108020000948 Antisense Oligonucleotides Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 241000282472 Canis lupus familiaris Species 0.000 description 2
- HEDRZPFGACZZDS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chloroform Chemical compound ClC(Cl)Cl HEDRZPFGACZZDS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108010017826 DNA Polymerase I Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000004594 DNA Polymerase I Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 238000007400 DNA extraction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 108010014303 DNA-directed DNA polymerase Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000016928 DNA-directed DNA polymerase Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 229920002307 Dextran Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 108090000860 Endopeptidase Clp Proteins 0.000 description 2
- YQYJSBFKSSDGFO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Epihygromycin Natural products OC1C(O)C(C(=O)C)OC1OC(C(=C1)O)=CC=C1C=C(C)C(=O)NC1C(O)C(O)C2OCOC2C1O YQYJSBFKSSDGFO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ULGZDMOVFRHVEP-RWJQBGPGSA-N Erythromycin Chemical compound O([C@@H]1[C@@H](C)C(=O)O[C@@H]([C@@]([C@H](O)[C@@H](C)C(=O)[C@H](C)C[C@@](C)(O)[C@H](O[C@H]2[C@@H]([C@H](C[C@@H](C)O2)N(C)C)O)[C@H]1C)(C)O)CC)[C@H]1C[C@@](C)(OC)[C@@H](O)[C@H](C)O1 ULGZDMOVFRHVEP-RWJQBGPGSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000078280 Escherichia coli S17 Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000701533 Escherichia virus T4 Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000192125 Firmicutes Species 0.000 description 2
- ZHNUHDYFZUAESO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Formamide Chemical compound NC=O ZHNUHDYFZUAESO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GRRNUXAQVGOGFE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hygromycin-B Natural products OC1C(NC)CC(N)C(O)C1OC1C2OC3(C(C(O)C(O)C(C(N)CO)O3)O)OC2C(O)C(CO)O1 GRRNUXAQVGOGFE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 102100034343 Integrase Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010061833 Integrases Proteins 0.000 description 2
- XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N Iron Chemical compound [Fe] XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KFZMGEQAYNKOFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Isopropanol Chemical compound CC(C)O KFZMGEQAYNKOFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000186779 Listeria monocytogenes Species 0.000 description 2
- 239000006142 Luria-Bertani Agar Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000006137 Luria-Bertani broth Substances 0.000 description 2
- CSNNHWWHGAXBCP-UHFFFAOYSA-L Magnesium sulfate Chemical compound [Mg+2].[O-][S+2]([O-])([O-])[O-] CSNNHWWHGAXBCP-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- 206010028980 Neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 229910019142 PO4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- ISWSIDIOOBJBQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phenol Chemical compound OC1=CC=CC=C1 ISWSIDIOOBJBQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 206010035664 Pneumonia Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 229920003171 Poly (ethylene oxide) Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 108020004511 Recombinant DNA Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 241001138501 Salmonella enterica Species 0.000 description 2
- 241001146168 Salmonella enterica subsp. enterica serovar Cubana Species 0.000 description 2
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000194017 Streptococcus Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000607626 Vibrio cholerae Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000607447 Yersinia enterocolitica Species 0.000 description 2
- 241000607477 Yersinia pseudotuberculosis Species 0.000 description 2
- 210000004102 animal cell Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 238000000137 annealing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000845 anti-microbial effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000890 antigenic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 210000001765 aortic valve Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 229940091771 aspergillus fumigatus Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000000211 autoradiogram Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000680 avirulence Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000036760 body temperature Effects 0.000 description 2
- DQXBYHZEEUGOBF-UHFFFAOYSA-N but-3-enoic acid;ethene Chemical compound C=C.OC(=O)CC=C DQXBYHZEEUGOBF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000005119 centrifugation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001332 colony forming effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000021615 conjugation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 description 2
- OPTASPLRGRRNAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N cytosine Chemical compound NC=1C=CNC(=O)N=1 OPTASPLRGRRNAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000034994 death Effects 0.000 description 2
- 231100000517 death Toxicity 0.000 description 2
- 230000002939 deleterious effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000009792 diffusion process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000000539 dimer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000012153 distilled water Substances 0.000 description 2
- NAGJZTKCGNOGPW-UHFFFAOYSA-N dithiophosphoric acid Chemical class OP(O)(S)=S NAGJZTKCGNOGPW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229940079593 drug Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 206010014665 endocarditis Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 229940032049 enterococcus faecalis Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000001976 enzyme digestion Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000005038 ethylene vinyl acetate Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000009472 formulation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002538 fungal effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001502 gel electrophoresis Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000001963 growth medium Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920001519 homopolymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 2
- GRRNUXAQVGOGFE-NZSRVPFOSA-N hygromycin B Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@@H](NC)C[C@@H](N)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O[C@H]1[C@H]2O[C@@]3([C@@H]([C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](C(N)CO)O3)O)O[C@H]2[C@@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O1 GRRNUXAQVGOGFE-NZSRVPFOSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229940097277 hygromycin b Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 239000007943 implant Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000000415 inactivating effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000001802 infusion Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000007928 intraperitoneal injection Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000006799 invasive growth in response to glucose limitation Effects 0.000 description 2
- PHTQWCKDNZKARW-UHFFFAOYSA-N isoamylol Chemical compound CC(C)CCO PHTQWCKDNZKARW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000002372 labelling Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000002502 liposome Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000002934 lysing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 210000004962 mammalian cell Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 230000013011 mating Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 2
- 108020004999 messenger RNA Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 2
- -1 miglyol) Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000010172 mouse model Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000003921 oil Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000019198 oils Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 238000002515 oligonucleotide synthesis Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004806 packaging method and process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 244000045947 parasite Species 0.000 description 2
- 210000001986 peyer's patch Anatomy 0.000 description 2
- 150000003014 phosphoric acid esters Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000013600 plasmid vector Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920001200 poly(ethylene-vinyl acetate) Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 235000010482 polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 229920001451 polypropylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920000053 polysorbate 80 Polymers 0.000 description 2
- FGIUAXJPYTZDNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N potassium nitrate Chemical compound [K+].[O-][N+]([O-])=O FGIUAXJPYTZDNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002685 pulmonary effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000002510 pyrogen Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000011084 recovery Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000003839 salts Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 101150065015 spa gene Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 101150012268 spas gene Proteins 0.000 description 2
- UCSJYZPVAKXKNQ-HZYVHMACSA-N streptomycin Chemical compound CN[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](CO)O[C@H]1O[C@@H]1[C@](C=O)(O)[C@H](C)O[C@H]1O[C@@H]1[C@@H](NC(N)=N)[C@H](O)[C@@H](NC(N)=N)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O UCSJYZPVAKXKNQ-HZYVHMACSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000004083 survival effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000009885 systemic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000002255 vaccination Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000035899 viability Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000005406 washing Methods 0.000 description 2
- QRBLKGHRWFGINE-UGWAGOLRSA-N 2-[2-[2-[[2-[[4-[[2-[[6-amino-2-[3-amino-1-[(2,3-diamino-3-oxopropyl)amino]-3-oxopropyl]-5-methylpyrimidine-4-carbonyl]amino]-3-[(2r,3s,4s,5s,6s)-3-[(2s,3r,4r,5s)-4-carbamoyl-3,4,5-trihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)oxan-2-yl]oxy-4,5-dihydroxy-6-(hydroxymethyl)- Chemical compound N=1C(C=2SC=C(N=2)C(N)=O)CSC=1CCNC(=O)C(C(C)=O)NC(=O)C(C)C(O)C(C)NC(=O)C(C(O[C@H]1[C@@]([C@@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](CO)O1)(C)O[C@H]1[C@@H]([C@](O)([C@@H](O)C(CO)O1)C(N)=O)O)C=1NC=NC=1)NC(=O)C1=NC(C(CC(N)=O)NCC(N)C(N)=O)=NC(N)=C1C QRBLKGHRWFGINE-UGWAGOLRSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UHPMCKVQTMMPCG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 5,8-dihydroxy-2-methoxy-6-methyl-7-(2-oxopropyl)naphthalene-1,4-dione Chemical compound CC1=C(CC(C)=O)C(O)=C2C(=O)C(OC)=CC(=O)C2=C1O UHPMCKVQTMMPCG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010042708 Acetylmuramyl-Alanyl-Isoglutamine Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000748061 Acholeplasma phage L2 Uncharacterized 16.1 kDa protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000818123 Acholeplasma phage L2 Uncharacterized 17.2 kDa protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000818108 Acholeplasma phage L2 Uncharacterized 81.3 kDa protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000787132 Acidithiobacillus ferridurans Uncharacterized 8.2 kDa protein in mobL 3'region Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000827262 Acidithiobacillus ferrooxidans Uncharacterized 18.9 kDa protein in mobE 3'region Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229920000936 Agarose Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 241000589155 Agrobacterium tumefaciens Species 0.000 description 1
- 101000811747 Antithamnion sp. UPF0051 protein in atpA 3'region Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 235000003911 Arachis Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 244000105624 Arachis hypogaea Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000370685 Arge Species 0.000 description 1
- 201000002909 Aspergillosis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000036641 Aspergillus infections Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 101000827607 Bacillus phage SPP1 Uncharacterized 8.5 kDa protein in GP2-GP6 intergenic region Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 244000063299 Bacillus subtilis Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000014469 Bacillus subtilis Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 101000961975 Bacillus thuringiensis Uncharacterized 13.4 kDa protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108020000946 Bacterial DNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000588807 Bordetella Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000283690 Bos taurus Species 0.000 description 1
- 108091003079 Bovine Serum Albumin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000964407 Caldicellulosiruptor saccharolyticus Uncharacterized 10.7 kDa protein in xynB 3'region Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000589876 Campylobacter Species 0.000 description 1
- 206010008631 Cholera Diseases 0.000 description 1
- KRKNYBCHXYNGOX-UHFFFAOYSA-K Citrate Chemical compound [O-]C(=O)CC(O)(CC([O-])=O)C([O-])=O KRKNYBCHXYNGOX-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- 241000193403 Clostridium Species 0.000 description 1
- 101000947615 Clostridium perfringens Uncharacterized 38.4 kDa protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000228437 Cochliobolus Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100007328 Cocos nucifera COS-1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091033380 Coding strand Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000008186 Collagen Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010035532 Collagen Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241001529387 Colletotrichum gloeosporioides Species 0.000 description 1
- 208000035473 Communicable disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241000552118 Cubana Species 0.000 description 1
- 201000003883 Cystic fibrosis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108020003215 DNA Probes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000007023 DNA restriction-modification system Effects 0.000 description 1
- 102000004163 DNA-directed RNA polymerases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000626 DNA-directed RNA polymerases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- AHCYMLUZIRLXAA-SHYZEUOFSA-N Deoxyuridine 5'-triphosphate Chemical compound O1[C@H](COP(O)(=O)OP(O)(=O)OP(O)(O)=O)[C@@H](O)C[C@@H]1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C=C1 AHCYMLUZIRLXAA-SHYZEUOFSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SHIBSTMRCDJXLN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Digoxigenin Natural products C1CC(C2C(C3(C)CCC(O)CC3CC2)CC2O)(O)C2(C)C1C1=CC(=O)OC1 SHIBSTMRCDJXLN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108700035208 EC 7.-.-.- Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100031780 Endonuclease Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010042407 Endonucleases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010067770 Endopeptidase K Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000305071 Enterobacterales Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000194033 Enterococcus Species 0.000 description 1
- 101000964391 Enterococcus faecalis UPF0145 protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000283086 Equidae Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000588698 Erwinia Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000588722 Escherichia Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000620209 Escherichia coli DH5[alpha] Species 0.000 description 1
- IAYPIBMASNFSPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylene oxide Chemical compound C1CO1 IAYPIBMASNFSPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920000219 Ethylene vinyl alcohol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 241000282326 Felis catus Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000223218 Fusarium Species 0.000 description 1
- 241001149475 Gaeumannomyces graminis Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000287828 Gallus gallus Species 0.000 description 1
- 208000005577 Gastroenteritis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229930182566 Gentamicin Natural products 0.000 description 1
- CEAZRRDELHUEMR-URQXQFDESA-N Gentamicin Chemical compound O1[C@H](C(C)NC)CC[C@@H](N)[C@H]1O[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O[C@@H]2[C@@H]([C@@H](NC)[C@@](C)(O)CO2)O)[C@H](N)C[C@@H]1N CEAZRRDELHUEMR-URQXQFDESA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000235503 Glomus Species 0.000 description 1
- WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-GASJEMHNSA-N Glucose Natural products OC[C@H]1OC(O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H]1O WQZGKKKJIJFFOK-GASJEMHNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101150009006 HIS3 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000606790 Haemophilus Species 0.000 description 1
- 101000912350 Haemophilus phage HP1 (strain HP1c1) DNA N-6-adenine-methyltransferase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000748063 Haemophilus phage HP1 (strain HP1c1) Uncharacterized 11.1 kDa protein in rep-hol intergenic region Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000818121 Haemophilus phage HP1 (strain HP1c1) Uncharacterized 18.2 kDa protein in rep-hol intergenic region Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000768777 Haloferax lucentense (strain DSM 14919 / JCM 9276 / NCIMB 13854 / Aa 2.2) Uncharacterized 50.6 kDa protein in the 5'region of gyrA and gyrB Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000589989 Helicobacter Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000238631 Hexapoda Species 0.000 description 1
- UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen Chemical compound [H][H] UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101000607404 Infectious laryngotracheitis virus (strain Thorne V882) Protein UL24 homolog Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100024319 Intestinal-type alkaline phosphatase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101710184243 Intestinal-type alkaline phosphatase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108091092195 Intron Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000588748 Klebsiella Species 0.000 description 1
- 101000790844 Klebsiella pneumoniae Uncharacterized 24.8 kDa protein in cps region Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000790840 Klebsiella pneumoniae Uncharacterized 49.5 kDa protein in cps region Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000790842 Klebsiella pneumoniae Uncharacterized 65.4 kDa protein in cps region Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101000735632 Klebsiella pneumoniae Uncharacterized 8.8 kDa protein in aacA4 3'region Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 231100000111 LD50 Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 241001149568 Laccaria Species 0.000 description 1
- GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-QKKXKWKRSA-N Lactose Natural products OC[C@H]1O[C@@H](O[C@H]2[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)C(O)O[C@@H]2CO)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O GUBGYTABKSRVRQ-QKKXKWKRSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000589248 Legionella Species 0.000 description 1
- 208000007764 Legionnaires' Disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241000228457 Leptosphaeria maculans Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100363550 Leptospira borgpetersenii serovar Hardjo-bovis (strain L550) rpsE2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108090001030 Lipoproteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004895 Lipoproteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 208000019693 Lung disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241001344131 Magnaporthe grisea Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100038261 Methanococcus vannielii (strain ATCC 35089 / DSM 1224 / JCM 13029 / OCM 148 / SB) rpo2C gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101100254826 Methanopyrus kandleri (strain AV19 / DSM 6324 / JCM 9639 / NBRC 100938) rps5 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229930192392 Mitomycin Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 241000186359 Mycobacterium Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000187480 Mycobacterium smegmatis Species 0.000 description 1
- NWIBSHFKIJFRCO-WUDYKRTCSA-N Mytomycin Chemical compound C1N2C(C(C(C)=C(N)C3=O)=O)=C3[C@@H](COC(N)=O)[C@@]2(OC)[C@@H]2[C@H]1N2 NWIBSHFKIJFRCO-WUDYKRTCSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101100301239 Myxococcus xanthus recA1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000588653 Neisseria Species 0.000 description 1
- 239000000020 Nitrocellulose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 101000781204 Orgyia pseudotsugata multicapsid polyhedrosis virus Uncharacterized 36.6 kDa protein Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 240000007594 Oryza sativa Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000007164 Oryza sativa Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 101150038013 PIR gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241001494479 Pecora Species 0.000 description 1
- 108091005804 Peptidases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 244000046052 Phaseolus vulgaris Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000010627 Phaseolus vulgaris Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 241000286209 Phasianidae Species 0.000 description 1
- LTQCLFMNABRKSH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phleomycin Natural products N=1C(C=2SC=C(N=2)C(N)=O)CSC=1CCNC(=O)C(C(O)C)NC(=O)C(C)C(O)C(C)NC(=O)C(C(OC1C(C(O)C(O)C(CO)O1)OC1C(C(OC(N)=O)C(O)C(CO)O1)O)C=1NC=NC=1)NC(=O)C1=NC(C(CC(N)=O)NCC(N)C(N)=O)=NC(N)=C1C LTQCLFMNABRKSH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010035235 Phleomycins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 235000014676 Phragmites communis Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 241000233614 Phytophthora Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000782724 Plenodomus tracheiphilus Species 0.000 description 1
- 208000009362 Pneumococcal Pneumonia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010035728 Pneumonia pneumococcal Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241000209504 Poaceae Species 0.000 description 1
- RVGRUAULSDPKGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Poloxamer Chemical compound C1CO1.CC1CO1 RVGRUAULSDPKGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920002732 Polyanhydride Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000954 Polyglycolide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001710 Polyorthoester Polymers 0.000 description 1
- GOOHAUXETOMSMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N Propylene oxide Chemical compound CC1CO1 GOOHAUXETOMSMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004365 Protease Substances 0.000 description 1
- 102100040307 Protein FAM3B Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 241000087479 Pseudocercospora fijiensis Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000184297 Pseudocercospora musae Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000520648 Pyrenophora teres Species 0.000 description 1
- 101710088936 Pyruvate kinase I Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000004570 RNA-binding Effects 0.000 description 1
- 241000589771 Ralstonia solanacearum Species 0.000 description 1
- 102100037486 Reverse transcriptase/ribonuclease H Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 241000589194 Rhizobium leguminosarum Species 0.000 description 1
- 101100394989 Rhodopseudomonas palustris (strain ATCC BAA-98 / CGA009) hisI gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010073443 Ribi adjuvant Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108020001027 Ribosomal DNA Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010039438 Salmonella Infections Diseases 0.000 description 1
- DYAHQFWOVKZOOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sarin Chemical compound CC(C)OP(C)(F)=O DYAHQFWOVKZOOW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108091081021 Sense strand Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010040047 Sepsis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 101000818100 Spirochaeta aurantia Uncharacterized 12.7 kDa protein in trpE 5'region Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000191940 Staphylococcus Species 0.000 description 1
- 101001037658 Streptomyces coelicolor (strain ATCC BAA-471 / A3(2) / M145) Glucokinase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000282887 Suidae Species 0.000 description 1
- QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-L Sulfate Chemical compound [O-]S([O-])(=O)=O QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfur Chemical compound [S] NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000005864 Sulphur Substances 0.000 description 1
- 102000000763 Survivin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010002687 Survivin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000008049 TAE buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108010006785 Taq Polymerase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000223996 Toxoplasma Species 0.000 description 1
- 101710134973 Uncharacterized 9.7 kDa protein in cox-rep intergenic region Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000221566 Ustilago Species 0.000 description 1
- 241001123669 Verticillium albo-atrum Species 0.000 description 1
- 241001123668 Verticillium dahliae Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000700605 Viruses Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000009754 Vitis X bourquina Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 235000012333 Vitis X labruscana Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 240000006365 Vitis vinifera Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000014787 Vitis vinifera Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 101710136524 X polypeptide Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000589636 Xanthomonas campestris Species 0.000 description 1
- 238000002835 absorbance Methods 0.000 description 1
- HGEVZDLYZYVYHD-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetic acid;2-amino-2-(hydroxymethyl)propane-1,3-diol;2-[2-[bis(carboxymethyl)amino]ethyl-(carboxymethyl)amino]acetic acid Chemical compound CC(O)=O.OCC(N)(CO)CO.OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CCN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O HGEVZDLYZYVYHD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000007513 acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012459 agar diffusion assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003513 alkali Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000004075 alteration Effects 0.000 description 1
- WNROFYMDJYEPJX-UHFFFAOYSA-K aluminium hydroxide Chemical compound [OH-].[OH-].[OH-].[Al+3] WNROFYMDJYEPJX-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- 229910021502 aluminium hydroxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001413 amino acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000003698 anagen phase Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000844 anti-bacterial effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940088710 antibiotic agent Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000000427 antigen Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108091007433 antigens Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000036639 antigens Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 230000008952 bacterial invasion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000010310 bacterial transformation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011324 bead Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010170 biological method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000033228 biological regulation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000004369 blood Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000008280 blood Substances 0.000 description 1
- 208000037815 bloodstream infection Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 210000000621 bronchi Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 244000309466 calf Species 0.000 description 1
- 229940041514 candida albicans extract Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000002230 centromere Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 235000013339 cereals Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 210000003710 cerebral cortex Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000002490 cerebral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003153 chemical reaction reagent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000002038 chemiluminescence detection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000013330 chicken meat Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- YTRQFSDWAXHJCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N chloroform;phenol Chemical compound ClC(Cl)Cl.OC1=CC=CC=C1 YTRQFSDWAXHJCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000013611 chromosomal DNA Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002759 chromosomal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001684 chronic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000020971 citrus fruits Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920001436 collagen Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007796 conventional method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229920001577 copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000001054 cortical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229940104302 cytosine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000003436 cytoskeletal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004925 denaturation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000036425 denaturation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000018109 developmental process Effects 0.000 description 1
- QONQRTHLHBTMGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N digitoxigenin Natural products CC12CCC(C3(CCC(O)CC3CC3)C)C3C11OC1CC2C1=CC(=O)OC1 QONQRTHLHBTMGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SHIBSTMRCDJXLN-KCZCNTNESA-N digoxigenin Chemical compound C1([C@@H]2[C@@]3([C@@](CC2)(O)[C@H]2[C@@H]([C@@]4(C)CC[C@H](O)C[C@H]4CC2)C[C@H]3O)C)=CC(=O)OC1 SHIBSTMRCDJXLN-KCZCNTNESA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000003596 drug target Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001962 electrophoresis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004520 electroporation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000001842 enterocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000000369 enteropathogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 101150076810 erm gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229960003276 erythromycin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- ZMMJGEGLRURXTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethidium bromide Chemical compound [Br-].C12=CC(N)=CC=C2C2=CC=C(N)C=C2[N+](CC)=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 ZMMJGEGLRURXTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960005542 ethidium bromide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000004715 ethylene vinyl alcohol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108010055246 excisionase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000000605 extraction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012091 fetal bovine serum Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005194 fractionation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 231100000221 frame shift mutation induction Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000037433 frameshift Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012737 fresh medium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010230 functional analysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 244000053095 fungal pathogen Species 0.000 description 1
- 101150045500 galK gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000003304 gavage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012215 gene cloning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007429 general method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960002518 gentamicin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000008103 glucose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003102 growth factor Substances 0.000 description 1
- UYTPUPDQBNUYGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N guanine Chemical group O=C1NC(N)=NC2=C1N=CN2 UYTPUPDQBNUYGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RZXDTJIXPSCHCI-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexa-1,5-diene-2,5-diol Chemical compound OC(=C)CCC(O)=C RZXDTJIXPSCHCI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000005571 horizontal transmission Effects 0.000 description 1
- 244000052637 human pathogen Species 0.000 description 1
- 230000028993 immune response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000000987 immune system Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000002649 immunization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002163 immunogen Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000338 in vitro Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000011534 incubation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001939 inductive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001524 infective effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002743 insertional mutagenesis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000968 intestinal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000004347 intestinal mucosa Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000003834 intracellular effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007918 intramuscular administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007852 inverse PCR Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052742 iron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000005304 joining Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000020061 kirsch Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 101150066555 lacZ gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000008101 lactose Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003902 lesion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000004185 liver Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000004807 localization Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052943 magnesium sulfate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000002844 melting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008018 melting Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003094 microcapsule Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000000386 microscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002480 mineral oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010446 mineral oil Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229960004857 mitomycin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001823 molecular biology technique Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010369 molecular cloning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000000865 mononuclear phagocyte system Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- BSOQXXWZTUDTEL-ZUYCGGNHSA-N muramyl dipeptide Chemical compound OC(=O)CC[C@H](C(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](C)NC(=O)[C@@H](C)O[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@@H](O)[C@@H]1NC(C)=O BSOQXXWZTUDTEL-ZUYCGGNHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000000869 mutational effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229920005615 natural polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229930014626 natural product Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 230000007935 neutral effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000000440 neutrophil Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229920001220 nitrocellulos Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 230000001293 nucleolytic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000016709 nutrition Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000010422 painting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037361 pathway Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000008188 pellet Substances 0.000 description 1
- 206010034674 peritonitis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000002688 persistence Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000001539 phagocyte Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-K phosphate Chemical compound [O-]P([O-])([O-])=O NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- 239000010452 phosphate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002504 physiological saline solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000747 poly(lactic acid) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004633 polyglycolic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004626 polylactic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000379 polymerizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229920005862 polyol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 150000003077 polyols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000011118 polyvinyl acetate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920002689 polyvinyl acetate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000013641 positive control Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012809 post-inoculation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 244000144977 poultry Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000013594 poultry meat Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000037452 priming Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001902 propagating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000069 prophylactic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000019419 proteases Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 230000001681 protective effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003908 quality control method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000001397 quillaja saponaria molina bark Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002285 radioactive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011552 rat model Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008707 rearrangement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 101150079601 recA gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000006798 recombination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005215 recombination Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 206010038351 renal abscess Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000009566 rice Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 101150085857 rpo2 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101150090202 rpoB gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101150027173 rpsE gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000022932 ruffle assembly Effects 0.000 description 1
- 206010039447 salmonellosis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229930182490 saponin Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 150000007949 saponins Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 101150008186 sctN gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 101150044364 sctN1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000003248 secreting effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010008 shearing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000377 silicon dioxide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000002741 site-directed mutagenesis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000000813 small intestine Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 108010062513 snake venom phosphodiesterase I Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000000935 solvent evaporation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000527 sonication Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002269 spontaneous effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005507 spraying Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010186 staining Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007619 statistical method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000000130 stem cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 208000022218 streptococcal pneumonia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229960005322 streptomycin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000007920 subcutaneous administration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000001174 sulfone group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229910021653 sulphate ion Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000006228 supernatant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001356 surgical procedure Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002194 synthesizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229920001059 synthetic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 101150064636 tnp gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 231100000331 toxic Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000002588 toxic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000003437 trachea Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000002103 transcriptional effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001131 transforming effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012137 tryptone Substances 0.000 description 1
- 201000008827 tuberculosis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241000712461 unidentified influenza virus Species 0.000 description 1
- 235000015112 vegetable and seed oil Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000008158 vegetable oil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000003462 vein Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229940118696 vibrio cholerae Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000029812 viral genome replication Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003612 virological effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000304 virulence factor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000007923 virulence factor Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000001835 viscera Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 239000012138 yeast extract Substances 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07K—PEPTIDES
- C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
- C07K14/195—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from bacteria
- C07K14/21—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from bacteria from Pseudomonadaceae (F)
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
- C12Q1/00—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
- C12Q1/02—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving viable microorganisms
- C12Q1/04—Determining presence or kind of microorganism; Use of selective media for testing antibiotics or bacteriocides; Compositions containing a chemical indicator therefor
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
- A61P31/04—Antibacterial agents
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P31/00—Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
- A61P31/10—Antimycotics
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
- A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
- A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
- A61P37/04—Immunostimulants
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07K—PEPTIDES
- C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
- C07K14/195—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from bacteria
- C07K14/24—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from bacteria from Enterobacteriaceae (F), e.g. Citrobacter, Serratia, Proteus, Providencia, Morganella, Yersinia
- C07K14/255—Salmonella (G)
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07K—PEPTIDES
- C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
- C07K14/195—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from bacteria
- C07K14/315—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from bacteria from Streptococcus (G), e.g. Enterococci
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07K—PEPTIDES
- C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
- C07K14/195—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from bacteria
- C07K14/315—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from bacteria from Streptococcus (G), e.g. Enterococci
- C07K14/3156—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from bacteria from Streptococcus (G), e.g. Enterococci from Streptococcus pneumoniae (Pneumococcus)
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07K—PEPTIDES
- C07K14/00—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
- C07K14/37—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from fungi
- C07K14/38—Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from fungi from Aspergillus
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N1/00—Microorganisms, e.g. protozoa; Compositions thereof; Processes of propagating, maintaining or preserving microorganisms or compositions thereof; Processes of preparing or isolating a composition containing a microorganism; Culture media therefor
- C12N1/20—Bacteria; Culture media therefor
- C12N1/205—Bacterial isolates
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N15/00—Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
- C12N15/09—Recombinant DNA-technology
- C12N15/10—Processes for the isolation, preparation or purification of DNA or RNA
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N15/00—Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
- C12N15/09—Recombinant DNA-technology
- C12N15/10—Processes for the isolation, preparation or purification of DNA or RNA
- C12N15/102—Mutagenizing nucleic acids
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N15/00—Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
- C12N15/09—Recombinant DNA-technology
- C12N15/10—Processes for the isolation, preparation or purification of DNA or RNA
- C12N15/1034—Isolating an individual clone by screening libraries
- C12N15/1065—Preparation or screening of tagged libraries, e.g. tagged microorganisms by STM-mutagenesis, tagged polynucleotides, gene tags
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N15/00—Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
- C12N15/09—Recombinant DNA-technology
- C12N15/10—Processes for the isolation, preparation or purification of DNA or RNA
- C12N15/1034—Isolating an individual clone by screening libraries
- C12N15/1082—Preparation or screening gene libraries by chromosomal integration of polynucleotide sequences, HR-, site-specific-recombination, transposons, viral vectors
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12N—MICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
- C12N15/00—Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
- C12N15/09—Recombinant DNA-technology
- C12N15/10—Processes for the isolation, preparation or purification of DNA or RNA
- C12N15/1034—Isolating an individual clone by screening libraries
- C12N15/1086—Preparation or screening of expression libraries, e.g. reporter assays
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
- C12Q1/00—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
- C12Q1/68—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
- C12Q1/00—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
- C12Q1/68—Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
- C12Q1/6876—Nucleic acid products used in the analysis of nucleic acids, e.g. primers or probes
- C12Q1/6888—Nucleic acid products used in the analysis of nucleic acids, e.g. primers or probes for detection or identification of organisms
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
- A61K2039/51—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies comprising whole cells, viruses or DNA/RNA
- A61K2039/52—Bacterial cells; Fungal cells; Protozoal cells
- A61K2039/522—Bacterial cells; Fungal cells; Protozoal cells avirulent or attenuated
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
- A61K2039/51—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies comprising whole cells, viruses or DNA/RNA
- A61K2039/52—Bacterial cells; Fungal cells; Protozoal cells
- A61K2039/523—Bacterial cells; Fungal cells; Protozoal cells expressing foreign proteins
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K38/00—Medicinal preparations containing peptides
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
- A61K39/00—Medicinal preparations containing antigens or antibodies
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12Q—MEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
- C12Q2600/00—Oligonucleotides characterized by their use
- C12Q2600/136—Screening for pharmacological compounds
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C12—BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
- C12R—INDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES C12C - C12Q, RELATING TO MICROORGANISMS
- C12R2001/00—Microorganisms ; Processes using microorganisms
- C12R2001/01—Bacteria or Actinomycetales ; using bacteria or Actinomycetales
- C12R2001/42—Salmonella
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02A—TECHNOLOGIES FOR ADAPTATION TO CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02A50/00—TECHNOLOGIES FOR ADAPTATION TO CLIMATE CHANGE in human health protection, e.g. against extreme weather
- Y02A50/30—Against vector-borne diseases, e.g. mosquito-borne, fly-borne, tick-borne or waterborne diseases whose impact is exacerbated by climate change
Definitions
- the present invention relates to methods for the identification of genes involved in the adaptation of a microorganism to its environment, particularly the identification of genes responsible for the virulence of a pathogenic microorganism.
- Antibiotic resistance in bacterial and other pathogens is becoming increasingly important. It is therefore important to find new therapeutic approaches to attack pathogenic microorganisms.
- Pathogenic microorganisms have to evade the host's defence mechanisms and be able to grow in a poor nutritional environment to establish an infection. To do so a number of “virulence” genes of the microorganism are required.
- Virulence genes have been detected using classical genetics and a variety of approaches have been used to exploit transposon mutagenesis for the identification of bacterial virulence genes. For example, mutants have been screened for defined physiological defects, such as the loss of iron regulated proteins (Holland et al, 1992), or in assays to study the penetration of epithelial cells (Finlay et al, 1988) and survival within macrophages (Fields et al, 1989; Miller et al, 1989a; Groisman et al, 1989). Transposon mutants have also been tested for altered virulence in live animal models of infection (Miller et al, 1989b).
- Walsh and Cepko (1992) Science 255, 434-440 describe a method of tracking the spatial location of cerebral cortical progenitor cells during the development of the cerebral cortex in the rat.
- the Walsh and Cepko method uses a tag that contains a unique nucleic acid sequence and the lacZ gene but there is no indication that useful mutants or genes could be detected by their method.
- Some virulence genes are already known for pathogenic microorganisms such as Escherichia coli, Salmonella typhimurium, Salmonella typhi, Vibrio cholerae, Clostridium botulinum, Yersinia pestis, Shigella flexneri and Listeria monocytogenes but in all cases only a relatively small number of the total have been identified.
- Salmonella typhimurium causes in mice provides a good experimental model of typhoid fever (Carter & Collins, 1974). Approximately forty two genes affecting Salmonella virulence have been identified to date (Groisman & Ochman, 1994). These represent approximately one third of the total number of predicted virulence genes (Groisman and Saier, 1990).
- the object of the present invention is to identify genes involved in the adaptation of a microorganism to its environment, particularly to identify further virulence genes in pathogenic microorganisms, with increased efficiency.
- a further object is to reduce the number of experimental animals used in identifying virulence genes.
- Still further objects of the invention provide vaccines, and methods for screening for drugs which reduce virulence.
- a first aspect of the invention provides a method for identifying a microorganism having a reduced adaptation to a particular environment comprising the steps of:
- step (1) providing individually a stored sample of each mutant produced by step (1) and providing individually stored nucleic acid comprising the unique marker sequence from each individual mutant;
- step (1) (3) introducing a plurality of mutants produced by step (1) into the said particular environment and allowing those microorganisms which are able to do so to grow in the said environment;
- step (4) comparing any marker sequences in the nucleic acid isolated in step (4) to the unique marker sequence of each individual mutant stored as in step (2);
- the method uses negative selection to identify microorganisms with reduced capacity to proliferate in the environment.
- a microorganism can live in a number of different environments and it is known that particular genes and their products allow the microorganism to adapt to a particular environment.
- a pathogenic microorganism such as a pathogenic bacterium or pathogenic fungus
- the product of one or more virulence genes is required.
- a gene of a microorganism which allows the microorganism to adapt to a particular environment is a virulence gene.
- the particular environment is a differentiated multicellular organism such as a plant or animal.
- Many bacteria and fungi are known to infect plants and they are able to survive within the plant and cause disease because of the presence of and expression from virulence genes.
- Suitable microorganisms when the particular environment is a plant include the bacteria Agrobacterium tumefaciens which forms tumours (galls) particularly in grape; Erwinia amylovara; Pseudomonas solanacearum which causes wilt in a wide range of plants; Rhizobium leguminosarum which causes disease in beans; Xanthomonas campestris p. v.
- citri which causes canker in citrus fruits; and include the fungi Magnaporthe grisea which causes rice blast disease; Fusarium spp. which cause a variety of plant diseases; Erisyphe spp.; Colletotrichum gloeosporiodes; Gaeumannomyces graminis which causes root and crown diseases in cereals and grasses; Glomus spp., Laccaria spp.; Leptosphaeria maculans; Phoma tracheiphila; Phytophthora spp., Pyrenophora teres; Verticillium alboatrum and V. dahliae ; and Mycosphaerella musicola and M. fijiensis .
- the microorganism is a fungus a haploid phase to its life cycle is required.
- microorganisms including bacteria, fungi, protozoa and trypanosomes are known to infect animals, particularly mammals including humans. Survival of the microorganism within the animal and the ability of the microorganism to cause disease is due in large part to the presence of and expression from virulence genes.
- Suitable bacteria include Bordetella spp. particularly B. pertussis, Campylobacter spp. particularly C. jejuni, Clostridium spp. particularly C. botulinum, Enterococcus spp. particularly E. faecalis, Escherichia spp. particularly E. coli, Haemophilus spp. particularly H. ducreyi and H.
- influenzae Helicobacter spp. particularly H. pylori, Klebsiella spp. particularly K. pneumoniae, Legionella spp. particularly L. pneumophila, Listeria spp. particularly L. monocytogenes, Mycobacterium spp. particularly M. smegmatis and M. tuberculosis, Neisseria spp. particularly N. gonorrhoeae and N. meningitidis, Pseudomonnas spp., particularly Ps. aeruginosa, Salmonella spp., Shigella spp., Staphylococcus spp. particularly S. aureus, Streptococcus spp. particularly S.
- pyogenes and pneumoniae Vibrio spp. and Yersinia spp. particularly Y. pestis .
- All of these bacteria cause disease in man and also there are animal models of the disease.
- the particular environment is an animal which they can infect and in which they cause disease.
- Salmonella typhimunum is used to infect a mouse the mouse develops a disease which serves as a model for typhoid fever in man.
- Staphylococcus aureus causes bacteraemia and renal abscess formation in mice (Albus et al (1991) Infect. Immun. 59, 1008-1014) and endocarditis in rabbits (Perlman & Freedman (1971) Yale J. Biol. Med. 44, 206-213).
- a fungus or higher eukaryotic parasite is haploid for the relevant parts of its life (such as growth in the environment).
- a DNA-mediated integrative transformation system is available and, when the microorganism is a human pathogen, conveniently an animal model of the human disease is available.
- Suitable fungi pathogenic to humans include certain Aspergillus spp. (for example A. fumigatus ), Cryptococcus neoformans and Histoplasma capsulatum .
- Toxoplasma may also be used, being a parasite with a haploid phase during infection. Bacteria have a haploid genome.
- Animal models of human disease are often available in which the animal is a mouse, rat, rabbit, dog or monkey. It is preferred if the animal is a mouse.
- Virulence genes detected by the method of the invention using an animal model of a human disease are clearly very likely to be genes which determine the virulence of the microorganism in man.
- microorganisms for use in the methods of the invention are Salmonella typhimurium, Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Enterococcus faecalis, Pseudomonas aeruginosa and Aspergillus fumigatus.
- FIGS. 1A and 1B illustrate diagrammatically one particularly preferred method of the invention.
- FIG. 2 shows a Southern hybridisation analysis of DNA from 12 S. typhimurium exconjugants following digestion with EcoRV. The filter was probed with the kanamycin resistance gene of the mini-Tn5 transposon.
- FIG. 3 shows a colony blot hybridisation analysis of DNA from 48 S. typhimurium exconjugants from a half of a microtitre dish (A1-H6).
- the filter was hybridised with a probe comprising labelled amplified tags from DNA isolated from a pool of the first 24 colonies (A1-D6).
- FIGS. 4A through 4D show a DNA colony blot hybridisation analysis of 95 S. typhimurium exconjugants of a microtitre dish (A1-H11), which were injected into a mouse.
- Replicate filters were hybridised with labelled amplified tags from the pool (inoculum pattern), or with labelled amplified tags from DNA isolated from over 10,000 pooled colonies that were recovered from the spleen of the infected animal (spleen pattern).
- FIGS. 5A through 5D show the sequence of a Salmonella gene isolated using the method of the invention and a comparison to the Escherichia coli clp protease (SEQ ID NOS 39 and 40.
- FIGS. 6A through 6H show partial sequences of further Salmonella gene isolated using the method of the invention (SEQ ID Nos. 8 to 36).
- FIGS. 7A and 7B show the mapping of VGC2 on the S. typhimurium chromosome.
- A DNA probes from three regions of VGC2 were used in Southern hybridisation analysis of lysates from a set of S. typhimurium strains harbouring locked in Mud-P22 prophages. Lysates which hybridised to a 7.5 kb PstI fragment (probe A in FIG. 8 ) are shown. The other two probes used hybridised to the same lysates.
- B The insertion points and packaging directions of the phage are shown along with the map position in minutes (edition VIII, ref 22 in Example 4).
- the phage designations correspond to the following strains: 18P, TT15242; 18Q, 15241; 19P, TT15244; 19Q, TT15243; 20P, TT15246 and 20Q, TT15245 (Ref in Example 4).
- the locations of mapped genes are shown by horizontal bars and the approximate locations of other genes are indicated.
- FIGS. 8A, 8B , and 8 C show a physical and genetic map of VGC2.
- A The positions of 16 transposon insertions are shown above the line. The extent of VGC2 is indicated by the thicker line. The position and direction of transcription of ORFs described in the text of Example 4 are shown by arrows below the line, together with the names of similar genes, with the exception of ORFs 12 and 13 whose products are similar to the sensor and regulatory components respectively, of a variety of two component regulatory systems.
- B The location of overlapping clones and an EcoRI/XbaI restriction fragment from Mud-P22 prophage strain TT15244 are shown as filled bars.
- FIG. 9 describes mapping the boundaries of VGC2.
- A The positions of mapped genes at minutes 37 to 38 on the E. coli K12 chromosome are aligned with the corresponding region of the S. typhimurium LT2 chromosome (minutes 30 to 31).
- An expanded map of the VGC2 region is shown with 11 S. typhimurium (S. t.) DNA fragments used as probes (thick bars) and the restriction sites used to generate them: B, BamHI; C, ClaI; H, HindII; K, KpnI; P, PstI; N, NsiI and S, SalI.
- Probes that hybridised to E. coli K12 (E. c.) genomic DNA are indicated by +; those which failed to hybridise are indicated by ⁇ .
- FIGS. 10A and 10B show that VGC2 is conserved among and specific to the Salmonellae.
- Genomic DNA from Salmonella serovars and other pathogenic bacteria was restricted with PstI (A), HindII or EcoRV (B) and subjected to Southern hybridisation analysis, using a 2.2 kb PstI/HindIII fragment from lambda clone 7 as a probe (probe B FIG. 2 ).
- the filters were hybridised and washed under stringent (A) or non-stringent (B) conditions.
- FIGS. 11 A through 11 BW show the DNA sequence of “Sequence 1” of VGC2 from the centre to the left-hand end (see the arrow labelled Sequence 1 in FIG. 8 ).
- the DNA is translated in three forward reading frames (the amino acid sequences in the “a” reading frame are SEQ ID Nos. 45-187, the amino acid sequences in the “b” reading frame are SEQ ID Nos. 188-356, and the amino acid sequences in the “c” reading frame are SEQ ID Nos. 357-501) and the start and stop positions of putative genes and the transposon insertion positions for various mutants identified by STM are indicated (SEQ ID No 37).
- a * indicates a stop codon and standard nucleotide ambiguity codes are used where necessary.
- FIGS. 12A through 12P show the DNA sequence of “Sequence 2” of VGC2 (cluster C) (see the arrow labelled Sequence 2 in FIG. 8 ).
- the start and stop positions of putative genes, and the transposon insertion positions for various mutants identified by STM are indicated (SEQ ID No 38).
- SEQ ID No 38 As is conventional a * indicates a stop codon and standard nucleotide ambiguity codes are used where necessary.
- a nucleic acid comprising a unique marker sequence is made as follows.
- a complex pool of double stranded DNA sequence “tags” is generated using oligonucleotide synthesis and a polymerase chain reaction (PCR).
- Each DNA “tag” has a unique sequence of between about 20 and 80 bp, preferably about 40 bp which is flanked by “arms” of about 15 to 30 bp, preferably about 20 bp, which are common to all “tags”.
- the number of bp in the unique sequence is sufficient to allow large numbers (for example >10 10 ) of unique sequences to be generated by random oligonucleotide synthesis but not too large to allow the formation of secondary structures which may interfere with a PCR.
- the length of the arms should be sufficient to allow efficient priming of oligonucleotides in a PCR.
- PCR primers do not contain any complementary structures with each other longer than 2 bases, especially at their 3′ ends, as this feature may promote the formation of an artifactual product called “primer dimer”.
- primer dimer When the 3′ ends of the two primers hybridize, they form a “primed template” complex, and primer extension results in a short duplex product called “primer dimer”.
- Optimum annealing temperatures may be determined empirically and may be higher than predicted.
- Taq DNA polymerase does have activity in the 37-55° C. region, so primer extension will occur during the annealing step and the hybrid will be stabilized.
- concentrations of the primers are equal in conventional (symmetric) PCR and, typically, within 0.1- to 1- ⁇ M range.
- the “tags” are ligated into a transposon or transposon-like element to form the nucleic acid comprising a unique marker sequence.
- the transposon is carried on a suicide vector which is maintained as a plasmid in a “helper” organism, but which is lost after transfer to the microorganism of the method of the invention.
- the “helper” organism may be a strain of Escherichia coli
- the microorganism of the method may be Salmonella and the transfer is a conjugal transfer.
- the transposon can be lost after transfer, in a proportion of cells it undergoes a transposition event through which it integrates at random, along with its unique tag, into the genome of the microorganism used in the method.
- transposon or transposon-like element can be selected.
- a kanamycin resistance gene may be present in the transposon and exconjugants are selected on medium containing kanamycin. It is also possible to complement an auxotrophic marker in the recipient cell with a functional gene in the nucleic acid comprising the unique marker. This method is particularly convenient when fungi are used in the method.
- the complementing functional gene is not derived from the same species as the recipient microorganism, otherwise non-random integration events may occur.
- the transposon or transposon-like element is carried on a vector which is maintained episomally (ie not as part of the chromosome) in the microorganism used in the method of the first aspect of the invention when in a first given condition whereas, upon changing that condition to a second given condition, the episome cannot be maintained permitting the selection of a cell in which the transposon or transposon-like element has undergone a transposition event through which it integrates at random, along with its unique tag, into the genome of the microorganism used in the method.
- This particularly convenient embodiment is advantageous because, once a microorganism carrying the episomal vector is made, then each time the transposition event is selected for or induced by changing the condition of the microorganism (or a clone thereof) from a first given condition to a second given condition, the transposon can integrate at a different site in the genome of the microorganism.
- a master collection of microorganisms each member of which contains a unique tag sequence in the transposon or transposon-like element carried on the episomal vector (when in the first given condition)
- it can be used repeatedly to generate pools of random insertional mutants, each of which contains a different tag sequence (ie unique within the pool).
- This embodiment is particularly useful because (a) it reduces the number and complexity of manipulations required to generate the plurality (“pool”) of independently mutated microorganisms in step (1) of the method; and (b) the number of different tags need only be the same as the number of microorganisms in the plurality of microorganisms in step (1) of the method.
- Point (a) makes the method easier to use in organisms for which transposon mutagenesis is more difficult to perform (for example, Staphylococcus aureus ) and point (b) means that tag sequences with particularly good hybridisation characteristics can be selected therefore making quality control easier.
- the “pool” size is conveniently about 100 or 200 independently-mutated microorganisms and, therefore the master collection of microorganisms is conveniently stored in one or two 96-well microtitre plates.
- the first given condition is a first particular temperature or temperature range such as 25° C. to 32° C., most preferably about 30° C. and the second given condition is a second particular temperature or temperature range such as 35° C. to 45° C., most preferably 42° C.
- the first given condition is the presence of an antibiotic, such as streptomycin, and the second given condition is the absence of the said antibiotic; or the first given condition is the absence of an antibiotic and the second given condition is the presence of the said antibiotic.
- Transposons suitable for integration into the genome of Gram negative bacteria include Tn5, Tn10 and derivatives thereof.
- Transposons suitable for integration into the genome of Gram positive bacteria include Tn916 and derivatives or analogues thereof.
- Transposons particularly suited for use with Staphylococcus aureus include Tn917 (Cheung et al (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89, 6462-6466) and Tn918 (Albus et al (1991) Infect. Immun. 59, 1008-1014).
- transposons have the properties of the Tn917 derivatives described by Camilli et al (1990) J. Bacteriol. 172, 3738-3744, and are carried by a temperature-sensitive vector such as pE194Ts (Villafane et al (1987) J. Bacteriol. 169, 4822-4829).
- transposons are convenient for insertionally inactivating a gene
- any other known method, or method developed in the future may be used.
- a further convenient method of insertionally inactivating a gene, particularly in certain bacteria such as Streptococcus is using insertion-duplication mutagenesis such as that described in Morrison et al (1984) J. Bacteriol 159, 870 with respect to S. pneumoniae .
- the general method may also be applied to other microorganisms, especially bacteria.
- insertional mutations are created by transformation using DNA fragments or plasmids carrying the “tags” and, preferably, selectable markers encoding, for example, resistance to hygromycin B or phleomycin (see Smith et al (1994) Infect. Immunol. 62, 5247-5254). Random, single integration of DNA fragments encoding hygromycin B resistance into the genome of filamentous fungi, using restriction enzyme mediated integration (REMI; Schiestl & Petes (1991); Lu et al (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91, 12649-12653) are known.
- restriction enzyme mediated integration REMI; Schiestl & Petes (1991); Lu et al (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91, 12649-12653
- a simple insertional mutagenesis technique for a fungus is described in Schiestl & Petes (1994) incorporated herein by reference, and include, for example, the use of Ty elements and ribosomal DNA in yeast.
- Random integration of the transposon or other DNA sequence allows isolation of a plurality of independently mutated microorganisms wherein a different gene is insertionally inactivated in each mutant and each mutant contains a different marker sequence.
- a library of such insertion mutants is arrayed in welled microtitre dishes so that each well contains a different mutant microorganism.
- DNA comprising the unique marker sequence from each individual mutant microorganism (conveniently, the total DNA from the clone is used) is stored. Conveniently, this is done by removing a sample of the microorganism from the microtitre dish, spotting it onto a nucleic acid hybridisation membrane (such as nitrocellulose or nylon membranes), lysing the microorganism in alkali and fixing the nucleic acid to the membrane.
- a replica of the contents of the welled microtitre dishes is made.
- pools of transposon mutants are made to introduce into the particular environment. Conveniently, 96-well microtitre dishes are used and the pool contains 96 transposon mutants. However, the lower limit for the pool is two mutants; there is no theoretical upper limit to the size of the pool but, as discussed below, the upper limit may be determined in relation to the environment into which the mutants are introduced.
- microorganisms Once the microorganisms are introduced into the said particular environment those microorganisms which are able to do so are allowed to grow in the environment.
- the length of time the microorganisms are left in the environment is determined by the nature of the microorganism and the environment. After a suitable length of time, the microorganisms are recovered from the environment, DNA is extracted and the DNA is used as a template for a PCR using primers that anneal to the “arms” flanking the “tags”.
- the PCR product is labelled, for example with 32 P, and is used to probe the DNA stored from each individual mutant replicated from the welled microtitre dish.
- Stored DNA are identified which hybridise weakly or not at all with the probe generated from the DNA isolated from the microorganisms recovered from environment. These non-hybridising DNAs correspond to mutants whose adaptation to the particular environment has been attenuated by insertion of the transposon or other DNA sequence.
- the “arms” have no, or very little, label compared to the “tags”.
- the PCR primers are suitably designed to contain no, or a single, G residue
- the 32 P-labelled nucleotide is dCTP and, in this case, no or one radiolabelled C residue is incorporated in each “arm” but a greater number of radiolabelled C residues are incorporated in the “tag”.
- the “tag” has at least ten-fold more label incorporated than the “arms”; preferably twenty-fold or more; more preferably fifty-fold or more.
- the “arms” can be removed from the “tag” using a suitable restriction enzyme, a site for which may be incorporated in the primer design.
- a particularly preferred embodiment of the invention is when the microorganism is a pathogenic microorganism and the particular environment is an animal.
- the size of the pool of mutants introduced into the animal is determined by (a) the number of cells of each mutant that are likely to survive in the animal (assuming a virulence gene has not been inactivated) and (b) the total inoculum of the microorganism. If the number in (a) is too low then false positive results may arise and if the number in (b) is too high then the animal may die before enough mutants have had a chance to grow in the desired way.
- the number of cells in (a) can be determined for each microorganism used but it is preferably more than 50, more preferably more than 100.
- the number of different mutants that can be introduced into a single animal is preferably between 50 and 500, conveniently about 100. It is preferred if the total inoculum does not exceed 10 6 cells (and it is preferably 10 5 cells) although the size of the inoculum may be varied above or below this amount depending on the microorganism and the animal.
- an inoculum of 10 5 is used containing 1000 cells each of 100 different mutants for a single animal. It will be appreciated that in this method one animal can be used to screen 100 mutants compared to prior art methods which require at least 100 animals to screen 100 mutants.
- the time between the pool of mutants being introduced into the animal and the microorganisms being recovered may vary with the microorganism and animal used. For example, when the animal is a mouse and the microorganism is Salmonella typhimurium , the time between inoculation and recovery is about three days.
- microorganisms are retrieved from the environment in step (5) at a site remote from the site of introduction in step (4), so that the virulence genes being investigated include those involved in the spread of the microorganism between the two sites.
- the microorganism may be introduced in a lesion in the stem or at one site on a leaf and the microorganism retrieved from another site on the leaf where a disease state is indicated.
- the microorganism may be introduced orally, intraperitoneally, intravenously or intranasally and is retrieved at a later time from an internal organ such as the spleen. It may be useful to compare the virulence genes identified by oral administration and those identified by intraperitoneal administration as some genes may be required to establish infection by one route but not by the other. It is preferred if Salmonella is introduced intraperitoneally.
- virulence genes are animal cells in culture (particularly macrophages and epithelial cells) and plant cells in culture. Although using cells in culture will be useful in its own right, it will also complement the use of the whole animal or plant, as the case may be, as the environment.
- the environment is a part of the animal body.
- a number of different environments are possible, including different organs and tissues, and parts thereof such as the Peyer's patch.
- the number of individual microorganisms (ie cells) recovered from the environment should be at least twice, preferably at least ten times, more preferably 100-times the number of different mutants introduced into the environment. For example, when an animal is inoculated with 100 different mutants around 10,000 individual microorganisms should be retrieved and their marker DNA isolated.
- auxotroph that is a mutant microorganism which requires growth factors not needed by the wild type or by prototrophs
- a mutant microorganism wherein a gene allowing the microorganism to adapt to a particular environment is inactivated is done between steps (1) and (2) or after step (6).
- auxotrophs are not removed when virulence genes are being identified.
- a second aspect of the invention provides a method of identifying a gene which allows a microorganism to adapt to a particular environment, the method comprising the method of the first aspect of the invention, followed by the additional step:
- the virulence genes When the microorganism is a microorganism pathogenic to an animal and the gene is a virulence gene and a transposon has been used to insertionally inactivate the gene, it is convenient for the virulence genes to be cloned by digesting genomic DNA from the individual mutant selected in step (6) with a restriction enzyme which cuts outside the transposon, ligating size-fractionated DNA containing the transposon into a plasmid, and selecting plasmid recombinants on the basis of antibiotic resistance conferred by the transposon and not by the plasmid.
- the microorganism genomic DNA adjacent to the transposon is sequenced using two primers which anneal to the terminal regions of the transposon, and two primers which anneal close to the polylinker sequences of the plasmid.
- the sequences may be subjected to DNA database searches to determine if the transposon has interrupted a known virulence gene.
- sequence obtained by this method is compared against the sequences present in the publicly available databases such as EMBL and GenBank.
- the mutation is transferred to a new genetic background (for example by phage P22-mediated transduction in the case of Salmonella ) and the LD 50 of the mutant strain is determined to confirm that the avirulent phenotype is due to the transposition event and not a secondary mutation.
- the number of individual mutants screened in order to detect all of the virulence genes in a microorganism depends on the number of genes in the genome of the microorganism. For example, it is likely that 3000-5000 mutants of Salmonella typhimurium need to be screened in order to detect the majority of virulence genes whereas for Aspergillus spp., which has a larger genome than Salmonella , around 20 000 mutants are screened. Approximately 4% of non-essential S. typhimurium genes are thought to be required for virulence (Grossman & Saier, 1990) and, if so, the S. typhimurium genome contains approximately 150 virulence genes. However, the methods of the invention provide a faster, more convenient and much more practicable route to identifying virulence genes.
- a third aspect of the invention provides a microorganism obtained using the method of the first aspect of the invention.
- microorganisms are useful because they have the property of not being adapted to survive in a particular environment.
- a pathogenic microorganism is not adapted to survive in a host organism (environment) and, in the case of microorganisms that are pathogenic to animals, particularly mammals, more particularly humans, the mutant obtained by the method of the invention may be used in a vaccine.
- the mutant is avirulent, and therefore expected to be suitable for administration to a patient, but it is expected to be antigenic and give rise to a protective immune response.
- the pathogenic microorganism not adapted to survive in a host organism, obtained by the methods of the invention is modified, preferably by the introduction of a suitable DNA sequence, to express an antigenic epitope from another pathogen.
- This modified microorganism can act as a vaccine for that other pathogen.
- a fourth aspect of the invention provides a microorganism comprising a mutation in a gene identified using the method of the second aspect of the invention.
- the microorganism of the third aspect of the invention is useful, it is preferred if a mutation is specifically introduced into the identified gene.
- the mutation in the gene is a deletion or a frameshift mutation or any other mutation which is substantially incapable of reverting.
- Such gene-specific mutations can be made using standard procedures such as introducing into the microorganism a copy of the mutant gene on an autonomous replicon (such as a plasmid or viral genome) and relying on homologous recombination to introduce the mutation into the copy of the gene in the genome of the microorganism.
- Fifth and sixth aspects of the invention provide a suitable microorganism for use in a vaccine and a vaccine comprising a suitable microorganism and a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier.
- the suitable microorganism is the aforementioned avirulent mutant.
- one or more mutant microorganisms are prepared in an immunogenic formulation containing suitable adjuvants and carriers and administered to the patient in known ways.
- suitable adjuvants include Freund's complete or incomplete adjuvant, muramyl dipeptide, the “Iscoms” of EP 109 942, EP 180 564 and EP 231 039, aluminium hydroxide, saponin, DEAE-dextran, neutral oils (such as miglyol), vegetable oils (such as arachis oil), liposomes, Pluronic polyols or the Ribi adjuvant system (see, for example GB-A-2 189 141). “Pluronic” is a Registered Trade Mark.
- the patient to be immunised is a patient requiring to be protected from the disease caused by the virulent form of the microorganism.
- the aforementioned avirulent microorganisms of the invention or a formulation thereof may be administered by any conventional method including oral and parenteral (eg subcutaneous or intramuscular) injection.
- the treatment may consist of a single dose or a plurality of doses over a period of time.
- an avirulent microorganism of the invention Whilst it is possible for an avirulent microorganism of the invention to be administered alone, it is preferable to present it as a pharmaceutical formulation, together with one or more acceptable carriers.
- the carrier(s) must be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the avirulent microorganism of the invention and not deleterious to the recipients thereof.
- the carriers will be water or saline which will be sterile and pyrogen free.
- the vaccine of the invention may be useful in the fields of human medicine and veterinary medicine.
- the vaccines of the invention when containing an appropriate avirulent microorganism, particularly avirulent bacterium, are useful in man but also in, for example, cows, sheep, pigs, horses, dogs and cats, and in poultry such as chickens, turkeys, ducks and geese.
- Seventh and eighth aspects of the invention provide a gene obtained by the method of the second aspect of the invention, and a polypeptide encoded thereby.
- gene we include not only the regions of DNA that code for a polypeptide but also regulatory regions of DNA such as regions of DNA that regulate transcription, translation and, for some microorganisms, splicing of RNA.
- the gene includes promoters, transcription terminators, ribosome-binding sequences and for some organisms introns and splice recognition sites.
- sequence information of the inactivated gene obtained in step 7 is derived.
- sequences close to the ends of the transposon are used as the hybridisation site of a sequencing primer.
- the derived sequence or a DNA restriction fragment adjacent to the inactivated gene itself is used to make a hybridisation probe with which to identify, and isolate from a wild-type organism, the corresponding wild type gene. It is preferred if the hybridisation probing is done under stringent conditions to ensure that the gene, and not a relative, is obtained.
- stringent we mean that the gene hybridises to the probe when the gene is immobilised on a membrane and the probe (which, in this case is >200 nucleotides in length) is in solution and the immobilised gene/hybridised probe is washed in 0.1.times.SSC at 65° C. for 10 min. SSC is 0.15 M NaCl/0.015 M Na citrate.
- FIGS. 5 and 6 Preferred probe sequences for cloning Salmonella virulence genes are shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 (SEQ ID NOS:39-44 and 8-36) and described in Example 2.
- Salmonella virulence genes comprise the sequence shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and described in Example 2.
- genes are those contained within, or at least part of which is contained within, the sequences shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 (SEQ ID NOS:37 and 38) and which have been identified by the method of the second aspect of the invention.
- the sequences shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 are part of a gene cluster from Salmonella typhimurium which I have called virulence gene cluster 2 (VGC2).
- VCC2 virulence gene cluster 2
- the position of transposon insertions are indicated within the sequence, and these transposon insertions inactivate a virulence determinant of the organism.
- VGC2 contains other virulence genes which, as described below, form part of the invention.
- the gene isolated by the method of the invention can be expressed in a suitable host cell.
- the gene (DNA) may be used in accordance with known techniques, appropriately modified in view of the teachings contained herein, to construct an expression vector, which is then used to transform an appropriate host cell for the expression and production of the polypeptide of the invention.
- Such techniques include those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,440,859 issued Apr. 3, 1984 to Rutter et al, U.S. Pat. No. 4,530,901 issued Jul. 23, 1985 to Weissman, U.S. Pat. No. 4,582,800 issued Apr. 15, 1986 to Crowl, U.S. Pat. No. 4,677,063 issued Jun. 30, 1987 to Mark et al, U.S. Pat. No.
- DNA encoding the polypeptide constituting the compound of the invention may be joined to a wide variety of other DNA sequences for introduction into an appropriate host.
- the companion DNA will depend upon the nature of the host, the manner of the introduction of the DNA into the host, and whether episomal maintenance or integration is desired.
- the DNA is inserted into an expression vector, such as a plasmid, in proper orientation and correct reading frame for expression.
- an expression vector such as a plasmid
- the DNA may be linked to the appropriate transcriptional and translational regulatory control nucleotide sequences recognised by the desired host, although such controls are generally available in the expression vector.
- the vector is then introduced into the host through standard techniques. Generally, not all of the hosts will be transformed by the vector. Therefore, it will be necessary to select for transformed host cells.
- One selection technique involves incorporating into the expression vector a DNA sequence, with any necessary control elements, that codes for a selectable trait in the transformed cell, such as antibiotic resistance.
- the gene for such selectable trait can be on another vector, which is used to co-transform the desired host cell.
- Host cells that have been transformed by the recombinant DNA of the invention are then cultured for a sufficient time and under appropriate conditions known to those skilled in the art in view of the teachings disclosed herein to permit the expression of the polypeptide, which can then be recovered.
- bacteria for example E. coli and Bacillus subtilis
- yeasts for example Saccharomyces cerevisiae
- filamentous fungi for example Aspergillus
- plant cells animal cells and insect cells.
- the vectors include a prokaryotic replicon, such as the Co1E1 ori, for propagation in a prokaryote, even if the vector is to be used for expression in other, non-prokaryotic, cell types.
- the vectors can also include an appropriate promoter such as a prokaryotic promoter capable of directing the expression (transcription and translation) of the genes in a bacterial host cell, such as E. coli , transformed therewith.
- a promoter is an expression control element formed by a DNA sequence that permits binding of RNA polymerase and transcription to occur.
- Promoter sequences compatible with exemplary bacterial hosts are typically provided in plasmid vectors containing convenient restriction sites for insertion of a DNA segment of the present invention.
- Typical prokaryotic vector plasmids are pUC18, pUC19, pBR322 and pBR329 available from Biorad Laboratories, (Richmond, Calif., USA) and pTrc99A and pKK223-3 available from Pharmacia, Piscataway, N.J., USA.
- a typical mammalian cell vector plasmid is pSVL available from Pharmacia, Piscataway, N.J., USA. This vector uses the SV40 late promoter to drive expression of cloned genes, the highest level of expression being found in T antigen-producing cells, such as COS-1 cells.
- an inducible mammalian expression vector is pMSG, also available from Pharmacia. This vector uses the glucocorticoid-inducible promoter of the mouse mammary tumour virus long terminal repeat to drive expression of the cloned gene.
- Useful yeast plasmid vectors are pRS403-406 and pRS413-416 and are generally available from Stratagene Cloning Systems, La Jolla, Calif. 92037, USA.
- Plasmids pRS403, pRS404, pRS405 and pRS406 are Yeast Integrating plasmids (YIps) and incorporate the yeast selectable markers HIS3, TRP1, LEU2 and URA3.
- Plasmids pRS413-416 are Yeast Centromere plasmids (YCps).
- a variety of methods have been developed to operably link DNA to vectors via complementary cohesive termini. For instance, complementary homopolymer tracts can be added to the DNA segment to be inserted to the vector DNA. The vector and DNA segment are then joined by hydrogen bonding between the complementary homopolymeric tails to form recombinant DNA molecules.
- Synthetic linkers containing one or more restriction sites provide an alternative method of joining the DNA segment to vectors.
- the DNA segment generated by endonuclease restriction digestion as described earlier, is treated with bacteriophage T4 DNA polymerase or E. coli DNA polymerase I, enzymes that remove protruding, 3′-single-stranded termini with their 3′-5′-exonucleolytic activities, and fill in recessed 3′-ends with their polymerizing activities.
- the combination of these activities therefore generates blunt-ended DNA segments.
- the blunt-ended segments are then incubated with a large molar excess of linker molecules in the presence of an enzyme that is able to catalyze the ligation of blunt-ended DNA molecules, such as bacteriophage T4 DNA ligase.
- an enzyme that is able to catalyze the ligation of blunt-ended DNA molecules, such as bacteriophage T4 DNA ligase.
- the products of the reaction are DNA segments carrying polymeric linker sequences at their ends.
- These DNA segments are then cleaved with the appropriate restriction enzyme and ligated to an expression vector that has been cleaved with an enzyme that produces termini compatible with those of the DNA segment.
- Synthetic linkers containing a variety of restriction endonuclease sites are commercially available from a number of sources including International Biotechnologies Inc, New Haven, Conn., USA.
- a desirable way to modify the DNA encoding the polypeptide of the invention is to use the polymerase chain reaction as disclosed by Saiki et al (1988) Science 239, 487-491.
- the DNA to be enzymatically amplified is flanked by two specific oligonucleotide primers which themselves become incorporated into the amplified DNA.
- the said specific primers may contain restriction endonuclease recognition sites which can be used for cloning into expression vectors using methods known in the art.
- Variants of the genes also form part of the invention. It is preferred if the variant has at least 70% sequence identity, more preferably at least 85% sequence identity, most preferably at least 95% sequence identity with the genes isolated by the method of the invention. Of course, replacements, deletions and insertions may be tolerated.
- the degree of similarity between one nucleic acid sequence and another can be determined using the GAP program of the University of Wisconsin Computer Group.
- variants of proteins encoded by the genes are included.
- variants we include insertions, deletions and substitutions, either conservative or non-conservative, where such changes do not substantially alter the normal function of the protein.
- substitution is intended combinations such as Gly, Ala; Val, Ile, Leu; Asp, Glu; Asn, Gln; Ser, Thr; Lys, Arg; and Phe, Tyr.
- Such variants may be made using the well known methods of protein engineering and site-directed mutagenesis.
- a ninth aspect of the invention provides a method of identifying a compound which reduces the ability of a microorganism to adapt to a particular environment comprising the steps of selecting a compound which interferes with the function of (1) a gene obtained by the method of the second aspect of the invention or of (2) a polypeptide encoded by such a gene.
- Pairwise screens for compounds which affect the wild type cell but not a cell overproducing a gene isolated by the methods of the invention form part of this aspect of the invention.
- one cell is a wild type cell and a second cell is the Salmonella which is made to overexpress the gene isolated by the method of the invention.
- the viability and/or growth of each cell in the particular environment is determined in the presence of a compound to be tested to identify which compound reduces the viability or growth of the wild type cell but not the cell overexpressing the said gene.
- the gene is a virulence gene.
- the microorganism (such as S. typhimurium ) is made to over-express the virulence gene identified by the method of the first aspect of the invention.
- the “over-expressing” microorganism and (b) an equivalent microorganism (which does not over-express the virulence gene) are used to infect cells in culture.
- Whether a particular test compound will selectively inhibit the virulence gene function is determined by assessing the amount of the test compound which is required to prevent infection of the host cells by (a) the over-expressing microorganism and (b) the equivalent microorganism (at least for some virulence gene products it is envisaged that the test compound will inactivate them, and itself be inactivated, by binding to the virulence gene product). If more of the compound is required to prevent infection by the (a) than (b) then this suggests that the compound is selective.
- microorganisms such as Salmonella
- a mild antibiotic such as gentamicin (which does not penetrate host cells) and that the effect of the test compound in preventing infection of the cell by the microorganism is by lysing the said cell and determining how many microorganisms are present (for example by plating on agar).
- Pairwise screens can be designed in a number of related formats in which the relative sensitivity to a compound is compared using two genetically related strains. If the strains differ at a single locus, then a compound specific for that target can be identified by comparing each strain's sensitivity to the inhibitor. For example, inhibitors specific to the target will be more active against a super-sensitive test strain when compared to an otherwise isogenic sister strain. In an agar diffusion format, this is determined by measuring the size of the zone of inhibition surrounding the disc or well carrying the compound. Because of diffusion, a continuous concentration gradient of compound is set up, and the strain's sensitivity to inhibitors is proportional to the distance from the disc or well to the edge of the zone. General antimicrobials, or antimicrobials with modes of action other than the desired one are generally observed as having similar activities against the two strains.
- Another type of molecular genetic screen involving pairs of strains where a cloned gene product is overexpressed in one strain compared to a control strain.
- the rationale behind this type of assay is that the strain containing an elevated quantity of the target protein should be more resistant to inhibitors specific to the cloned gene product than an isogenic strain, containing normal amounts of the target protein.
- the zone size surrounding a specific compound is expected to be smaller in the strain overexpressing the target protein compared to an otherwise isogenic strain.
- a mutant microorganism obtained using the method of the first aspect of the invention is used as a control (it has a given phenotype, for example, avirulence).
- a compound to be tested is mixed with the wild-type microorganism.
- the wild-type microorganism is introduced into the environment (with or without the test compound).
- the compound is one which reduces the ability of the microorganism to adapt to, or survive in, the particular environment.
- the compound identified by this method can be used in a medicament to prevent or ameliorate infection with the microorganism.
- a tenth aspect of the invention therefore provides a compound identifiable by the method of the ninth aspect.
- uses of the compound of the tenth aspect are related to the method by which it can be identified, and in particular in relation to the host of a pathogenic microorganism.
- the compound may be useful in treating infection of a mammal by that bacterium.
- the compound may be useful in treating infection of a plant by that fungus.
- An eleventh aspect of the invention provides a molecule which selectively interacts with, and substantially inhibits the function of, a gene of the seventh aspect of the invention or a nucleic acid product thereof.
- nucleic acid product thereof we include any RNA, especially mRNA, transcribed from the gene.
- a molecule which selectively interacts with, and substantially inhibits the function of, said gene or said nucleic acid product is an antisense nucleic acid or nucleic acid derivative.
- said molecule is an antisense oligonucleotide.
- Antisense oligonucleotides are single-stranded nucleic acid, which can specifically bind to a complementary nucleic acid sequence. By binding to the appropriate target sequence, an RNA-RNA, a DNA-DNA, or RNA-DNA duplex is formed. These nucleic acids are often termed “antisense” because they are complementary to the sense or coding strand of the gene. Recently, formation of a triple helix has proven possible where the oligonucleotide is bound to a DNA duplex. It was found that oligonucleotides could recognise sequences in the major groove of the DNA double helix. A triple helix was formed thereby. This suggests that it is possible to synthesise sequence-specific molecules which specifically bind double-stranded DNA via recognition of major groove hydrogen binding sites.
- antisense nucleic acid or oligonucleotide can readily be determined by reference to the nucleotide sequence of the gene in question.
- antisense nucleic acid or oligonucleotides can be designed which are complementary to a part of the sequence shown in FIG. 11 or 12 , especially to sequences which form a part of a virulence gene.
- Oligonucleotides are subject to being degraded or inactivated by cellular endogenous nucleases.
- modified oligonucleotides eg having altered internucleotide linkages, in which the naturally occurring phosphodiester linkages have been replaced with another linkage.
- Agrawal et al (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85, 7079-7083 showed increased inhibition in tissue culture of HIV-1 using oligonucleotide phosphoramidates and phosphorothioates.
- Oligonucleotides having artificial linkages have been shown to be resistant to degradation in vivo.
- Shaw et al (1991) in Nucleic Acids Res. 19, 747-750 report that otherwise unmodified oligonucleotides become more resistant to nucleases in vivo when they are blocked at the 3′ end by certain capping structures and that uncapped oligonucleotide phosphorothioates are not degraded in vivo.
- oligonucleotide is a deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA), although ribonucleic acid (RNA) sequences may also be synthesized and applied.
- DNA deoxyribonucleic acid
- RNA ribonucleic acid
- the oligonucleotides useful in the invention preferably are designed to resist degradation by endogenous nucleolytic enzymes. In vivo degradation of oligonucleotides produces oligonucleotide breakdown products of reduced length. Such breakdown products are more likely to engage in non-specific hybridization and are less likely to be effective, relative to their full-length counterparts. Thus, it is desirable to use oligonucleotides that are resistant to degradation in the body and which are able to reach the targeted cells.
- the present oligonucleotides can be rendered more resistant to degradation in vivo by substituting one or more internal artificial internucleotide linkages for the native phosphodiester linkages, for example, by replacing phosphate with sulphur in the linkage.
- linkages examples include phosphorothioates, methylphosphonates, sulphone, sulphate, ketyl, phosphorodithioates, various phosphoramidates, phosphate esters, bridged phosphorothioates and bridged phosphoramidates.
- Such examples are illustrative, rather than limiting, since other internucleotide linkages are known in the art. See, for example, Cohen, (1990) Trends in Biotechnology.
- the synthesis of oligonucleotides having one or more of these linkages substituted for the phosphodiester internucleotide linkages is well known in the art, including synthetic pathways for producing oligonucleotides having mixed internucleotide linkages.
- Oligonucleotides can be made resistant to extension by endogenous enzymes by “capping” or incorporating similar groups on the 5′ or 3′ terminal nucleotides.
- a reagent for capping is commercially available as Amino-Link II.TM from Applied BioSystems Inc, Foster City, Calif. Methods for capping are described, for example, by Shaw et al (1991) Nucleic Acids Res. 19, 747-750 and Agrawal et al (1991) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88(17), 7595-7599, the teachings of which are hereby incorporated herein by reference.
- oligonucleotides resistant to nuclease attack are for them to be “self-stabilized” as described by Tang et al (1993) Nucl. Acids Res. 21, 2729-2735 in corporated herein by reference.
- Self-stabilized oligonucleotides have hairpin loop structures at their 3′ ends, and show increased resistance to degradation by snake venom phosphodiesterase, DNA polymerase I and fetal bovine serum.
- the self-stabilized region of the oligonucleotide does not interfere in hybridization with complementary nucleic acids, and pharmacokinetic and stability studies in mice have shown increased in vivo persistence of self-stabilized oligonucleotides with respect to their linear counterparts.
- the inherent binding specificity of antisense oligonucleotides characteristic of base pairing is enhanced by limiting the availability of the antisense compound to its intend locus in vivo, permitting lower dosages to be used and minimizing systemic effects.
- oligonucleotides are applied locally to achieve the desired effect.
- the concentration of the oligonucleotides at the desired locus is much higher than if the oligonucleotides were administered systemically, and the therapeutic effect can be achieved using a significantly lower total amount.
- the local high concentration of oligonucleotides enhances penetration of the targeted cells and effectively blocks translation of the target nucleic acid sequences.
- the oligonucleotides can be delivered to the locus by any means appropriate for localized administration of a drug.
- a solution of the oligonucleotides can be injected directly to the site or can be delivered by infusion using an infusion pump.
- the oligonucleotides also can be incorporated into an implantable device which when placed at the desired site, permits the oligonucleotides to be released into the surrounding locus.
- the oligonucleotides are most preferably administered via a hydrogel material.
- the hydrogel is noninflammatory and biodegradable. Many such materials now are known, including those made from natural and synthetic polymers.
- the method exploits a hydrogel which is liquid below body temperature but gels to form a shape-retaining semisolid hydrogel at or near body temperature.
- Preferred hydrogel are polymers of ethylene oxide-propylene oxide repeating units. The properties of the polymer are dependent on the molecular weight of the polymer and the relative percentage of polyethylene oxide and polypropylene oxide in the polymer.
- Preferred hydrogels contain from about 10 to about 80% by weight ethylene oxide and from about 20 to about 90% by weight propylene oxide.
- a particularly preferred hydrogel contains about 70% polyethylene oxide and 30% polypropylene oxide. Hydrogels which can be used are available, for example, from BASF Corp., Parsippany, N.J., under the tradename Pluronic.®.
- the hydrogel is cooled to a liquid state and the oligonucleotides are admixed into the liquid to a concentration of about 1 mg oligonucleotide per gram of hydrogel.
- the resulting mixture then is applied onto the surface to be treated, for example by spraying or painting during surgery or using a catheter or endoscopic procedures.
- the polymer warms, it solidifies to form a gel, and the oligonucleotides diffuse out of the gel into the surrounding cells over a period of time defined by the exact composition of the gel.
- the oligonucleotides can be administered by means of other implants that are commercially available or described in the scientific literature, including liposomes, microcapsules and implantable devices.
- implants made of biodegradable materials such as polyanhydrides, polyorthoesters, polylactic acid and polyglycolic acid and copolymers thereof, collagen, and protein polymers, or non-biodegradable materials such as ethylenevinyl acetate (EVAc), polyvinyl acetate, ethylene vinyl alcohol, and derivatives thereof can be used to locally deliver the oligonucleotides.
- biodegradable materials such as polyanhydrides, polyorthoesters, polylactic acid and polyglycolic acid and copolymers thereof, collagen, and protein polymers
- non-biodegradable materials such as ethylenevinyl acetate (EVAc), polyvinyl acetate, ethylene vinyl alcohol, and derivatives thereof can be used to locally deliver the oligonucleotides.
- EVAc
- the oligonucleotides can be incorporated into the material as it is polymerized or solidified, using melt or solvent evaporation techniques, or mechanically mixed with the material.
- the oligonucleotides are mixed into or applied onto coatings for implantable devices such as dextran coated silica beads, stents, or catheters.
- the dose of oligonucleotides is dependent on the size of the oligonucleotides and the purpose for which is it administered. In general, the range is calculated based on the surface area of tissue to be treated.
- the effective dose of oligonucleotide is somewhat dependent on the length and chemical composition of the oligonucleotide but is generally in the range of about 30 to 3000 ⁇ g per square centimeter of tissue surface area.
- the oligonucleotides may be administered to the patient systemically for both therapeutic and prophylactic purposes.
- the oligonucleotides may be administered by any effective method, for example, parenterally (eg intravenously, subcutaneously, intramuscularly) or by oral, nasal or other means which permit the oligonucleotides to access and circulate in the patient's bloodstream.
- Oligonucleotides administered systemically preferably are given in addition to locally administered oligonucleotides, but also have utility in the absence of local administration.
- a dosage in the range of from about 0.1 to about 10 grams per administration to an adult human generally will be effective for this purpose.
- the molecules of this aspect of the invention are useful in treating or preventing any infection caused by the microorganism from which the said gene has been isolated, or a close relative of said microorganism.
- the said molecule is an antibiotic.
- a twelfth aspect of the invention provides a molecule of the eleventh aspect of the invention for use in medicine.
- a thirteenth aspect of the invention provides a method of treating a host which has, or is susceptible to, an infection with a microorganism, the method comprising administering an effective amount of a molecule according to the eleventh aspect of the invention wherein said gene is present in said microorganisms, or a close relative of said microorganism.
- an effective amount we mean an amount which substantially prevents or ameliorates the infection.
- host we include any animal or plant which may be infected by a microorganism.
- compositions of the molecule of the eleventh aspect of the invention form part of the invention.
- Such pharmaceutical formulations comprise the said molecule together with one or more acceptable carriers.
- the carrier(s) must be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the said molecule of the invention and not deleterious to the recipients thereof.
- the carriers will be water or saline which will be sterile and pyrogen free.
- VGC2 DNA-DNA hybridisation experiments have determined that sequences homologous to at least part of VGC2 are found in many species and strains of Salmonella but are not present in the E. coli and Shigella strains ested (see Example 4). These sequences almost certainly correspond to conserved genes, at least in Salmonella , and at least some of which are virulence genes. It is believed that equivalent genes in other Salmonella species and, if present, equivalent genes in other enteric or other bacteria will also be virulence genes.
- a gene within the VGC2 region is a virulence gene is readily determined. For example, those genes within VGC2 which have been identified by the method of the second aspect of the invention (when applied to Salmonella typhimurium and wherein the environment is an animal such as a mouse) are virulence genes. Virulence genes are also identified by making a mutation in the gene (preferably a non-polar mutation) and determining whether the mutant strain is avirulent. Methods of making mutations in a selected gene are well known and are described below.
- a fourteenth aspect of the invention provides the VGC2 DNA of Salmonella typhimurium or a part thereof, or a variant of said DNA or a variant of a part thereof.
- the VGC2 DNA of Salmonella typhimurium is depicted diagrammatically in FIG. 8 and is readily obtainable from Salmonella typhimurium ATCC 14028 (available from the American Type Culture Collection, 10801 University Boulevard, Manassas, Va. 20110-2209 USA; also deposited at the NCTC, Public Health Laboratory Service, Colindale, UK under accession no. NCTC 12021) using the information provided in Example 4.
- probes derived from the sequences shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 may be used to identify lambda clones from a Salmonella typhimurium genomic library. Standard genome walking methods can be employed to obtain all of the VGC2 DNA.
- the restriction map shown in FIG. 8 can be used to identify and locate DNA fragments from VGC2.
- part of the VGC2 DNA of Salmonella typhimurium we mean any DNA sequence which comprises at least 10 nucleotides, preferably at least 20 nucleotides, more preferably at least 50 nucleotides, still more preferably at least 100 nucleotides, and most preferably at least 500 nucleotides of VGC2.
- a particularly preferred part of the VGC2 DNA is the sequence shown in FIG. 11 , or a part thereof.
- Another particularly preferred part of the VGC2 DNA is the sequence shown in FIG. 12 , or a part thereof.
- the part of the VGC2 DNA is a gene, or part thereof.
- Genes can be identified within the VGC2 region by statistical analysis of the open reading frames using computer programs known in the art. If an open reading frame is greater than about 100 codons it is likely to be a gene (although genes smaller than this are known). Whether an open reading frame corresponds to the polypeptide coding region of a gene can be determined experimentally. For example, a part of the DNA corresponding to the open reading frame may be used as a probe in a northern (RNA) blot to determine whether mRNA is expressed which hybridises to the said DNA; alternatively or additionally a mutation may be introduced into the open reading frame and the effect of the mutation on the phenotype of the microorganism can be determined. If the phenotype is changed then the open reading frame corresponds to a gene. Methods of identifying genes within a DNA sequence are known in the art.
- variant of said DNA or a variant of a part thereof we include any variant as defined by the term “variant” in the seventh aspect of the invention.
- variants of VGC2 DNA of Salmonella typhimurium include equivalent genes, or parts thereof, from other Salmonella species, such as Salmonella typhi and Salmonella enterica , as well as equivalent genes, or parts thereof, from other bacteria such as other enteric bacteria.
- equivalent gene we include genes which are functionally equivalent and those in which a mutation leads to a similar phenotype (such as avirulence). It will be appreciated that before the present invention VGC2 or the genes contained therein had not been identified and certainly not implicated in virulence determination.
- further aspects of the invention provide a mutant bacterium wherein if the bacterium normally contains a gene that is the same as or equivalent to a gene in VGC2, said gene is mutated or absent in said mutant bacterium; methods of making a mutant bacterium wherein if the bacterium normally contains a gene that is the same as or equivalent to a gene in VGC2, said gene is mutated or absent in said mutant bacterium.
- the following is a preferred method to inactivate a VGC2 gene.
- restriction enzymes one then introduces into the coding region of the gene a segment of DNA encoding resistance to an antibiotic (for example, kanamycin), possibly after deleting a portion of the coding region of the cloned gene by restriction enzymes.
- Methods and DNA constructs containing an antibiotic resistance marker are available to ensure that the inactivation of the gene of interest is preferably non-polar, that is to say, does not affect the expression of genes downstream from the gene of interest.
- the mutant version of the gene is then transferred from E. coli to Salmonella typhimurium using phage P22 transduction and transductants checked by Southern hybridisation for homologous recombination of the mutant gene into the chromosome.
- Still further aspects provide a use of said mutant mutant bacterium in a vaccine; pharmaceutical compositions comprising said bacterium and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier; a polypeptide encoded by VGC2 DNA of Salmonella typhimurium or a part thereof, or a variant of a part thereof; a method of identifying a compound which reduces the ability of a bacterium to infect or cause disease in a host; a compound identifiable by said method; a molecule which selectively interacts with, and substantially inhibits the function of, a gene in VGC2 or a nucleic product thereof; and medical uses and pharmaceutical compositions thereof.
- the VGC2 DNA contains genes which have been identified by the methods of the first and second aspects of the invention as well as genes which have been identified by their location (although identifiable by the methods of the first and second aspects of the invention).
- These further aspects of the invention relate closely to the fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth, tenth, eleventh, twelfth and thirteenth aspects of the invention and, accordingly, the information given in relation to those aspects, and preferences expressed in relation to those aspects, applies to these further aspects.
- the gene is from VGC2 or is an equivalent gene from another species of Salmonella such as S. typhi . It is preferred if the mutant bacterium is a S. typhimurium mutant or a mutant of another species of Salmonella such as S. typhi.
- VGC2 VGC2
- FIGS. 1A and 1B illustrate diagrammatically one particularly preferred method of the invention.
- FIG. 2 shows a Southern hybridisation analysis of DNA from 12 S. typhimurium exconjugants following digestion with EcoRV. The filter was probed with the kanamycin resistance gene of the mini-Tn5 transposon.
- FIG. 3 shows a colony blot hybridisation analysis of DNA from 48 S. typhimurium exconjugants from a half of a microtitre dish (A1-H6).
- the filter was hybridised with a probe comprising labelled amplified tags from DNA isolated from a pool of the first 24 colonies (A1-D6).
- FIGS. 4A through 4D show a DNA colony blot hybridisation analysis of 95 S. typhimurium exconjugants of a microtitre dish (A1-H11), which were injected into a mouse.
- Replicate filters were hybridised with labelled amplified tags from the pool (inoculum pattern), or with labelled amplified tags from DNA isolated from over 10,000 pooled colonies that were recovered from the spleen of the infected animal (spleen pattern).
- Colonies B6, A11 and C8 gave rise to weak hybridisation signals on both sets of filters.
- Hybridisation signals from colonies A3, C5, G3 (aroA), and F10 are present on the inoculum pattern but not on the spleen pattern.
- FIGS. 5A through 5D show the sequence of a Salmonella gene isolated using the method of the invention and a comparison to the Escherichia coli clp protease (SEQ ID NOS 39 and 40.
- FIGS. 6A through 6H show partial sequences of further Salmonella gene isolated using the method of the invention (SEQ ID Nos. 8 to 36).
- FIGS. 7A and 7B show the mapping of VGC2 on the S. typhimurium chromosome.
- A DNA probes from three regions of VGC2 were used in Southern hybridisation analysis of lysates from a set of S. typhimurium strains harbouring locked in Mud-P22 prophages. Lysates which hybridised to a 7.5 kb PstI fragment (probe A in FIG. 8 ) are shown. The other two probes used hybridised to the same lysates.
- B The insertion points and packaging directions of the phage are shown along with the map position in minutes (edition VIII, ref 22 in Example 4).
- the phage designations correspond to the following strains: 18P, TT15242; 18Q, 15241; 19P, TT15244; 19Q, TT15243; 20P, TT15246 and 20Q, TT15245 (Ref in Example 4).
- the locations of mapped genes are shown by horizontal bars and the approximate locations of other genes are indicated.
- FIGS. 8A, 8B , and 8 C show a physical and genetic map of VGC2.
- A The positions of 16 transposon insertions are shown above the line. The extent of VGC2 is indicated by the thicker line. The position and direction of transcription of ORFs described in the text of Example 4 are shown by arrows below the line, together with the names of similar genes, with the exception of ORFs 12 and 13 whose products are similar to the sensor and regulatory components respectively, of a variety of two component regulatory systems.
- B The location of overlapping clones and an EcoRI/XbaI restriction fragment from Mud-P22 prophage strain TT15244 are shown as filled bars.
- FIG. 9 describes mapping the boundaries of VGC2.
- A The positions of mapped genes at minutes 37 to 38 on the E. coli K12 chromosome are aligned with the corresponding region of the S. typhimurium LT2 chromosome (minutes 30 to 31).
- An expanded map of the VGC2 region is shown with 11 S. typhimurium (S. t.) DNA fragments used as probes (thick bars) and the restriction sites used to generate them: B, BamHI; C, ClaI; H, HindII; K, KpnI; P, PstI; N, NsiI and S, SalI.
- Probes that hybridised to E. coli K12 (E. c.) genomic DNA are indicated by +; those which failed to hybridise are indicated by ⁇ .
- FIGS. 10A and 10B show that VGC2 is conserved among and specific to the Salmonellae.
- Genomic DNA from Salmonella serovars and other pathogenic bacteria was restricted with PstI (A), HindII or EcoRV (B) and subjected to Southern hybridisation analysis, using a 2.2 kb PstI/HindIII fragment from lambda clone 7 as a probe (probe B FIG. 2 ).
- the filters were hybridised and washed under stringent (A) or non-stringent (B) conditions.
- FIGS. 11 A through 11 BW show the DNA sequence of “Sequence 1” of VGC2 from the centre to the left-hand end (see the arrow labelled Sequence 1 in FIG. 8 ).
- the DNA is translated in three forward reading frames (the amino acid sequences in the “a” reading frame are SEQ ID Nos. 45-187, the amino acid sequences in the “b” reading frame are SEQ ID Nos. 188-356, and the amino acid sequences in the “c” reading frame are SEQ ID Nos. 357-501) and the start and stop positions of putative genes and the transposon insertion positions for various mutants identified by STM are indicated (SEQ ID No 37).
- FIGS. 12A through 12P show the DNA sequence of “Sequence 2” of VGC2 (cluster C) (see the arrow labelled Sequence 2 in FIG. 8 ).
- the start and stop positions of putative genes, and the transposon insertion positions for various mutants identified by STM are indicated (SEQ ID No 38).
- FIGS. 7 to 12 are most relevant to Example 4.
- Salmonella typhimurium strain 12023 (equivalent to American Type Collection of Type Cultures (NCTC), Public Health Laboratory Service, Colindale, London, UK. A spontaneous nalidixic acid resistant mutant of this strain (12023 Nal r ) was selected in our laboratory. Another derivative of strain 12023, CL1509 (aroA::Tn10) was a gift from Fred Heffron.
- Escherichia coli strains CC118 lambdapir ( ⁇ [ara-leu], araD, .DELTA.lacX74, galE, galK, phoA20, thi-1, rpsE, rpoB, argE(Am), recA1, lambdapir phage lysogen) and S17-1 lambdapir(Tp r , Sm r , recA, thi, pro, hsdR ⁇ , M + , RP4:2-Tc:Mu:KmTn7, lambdapir) were gifts from Kenneth Timmis. E.
- Plasmid pUTmini-Tn5Km2 (de Lorenzo et al, 1990) was a gift from Kenneth Timmis.
- the oligonucleotide pool RT1 (5′-CTAGGTACCTACAACCTCAAGCTT-[NK] 20 -AAGCTTGGTTAGAATGGGTACCATG-3′) (SEQ ID No 1), and primers P2 (5′-TACCTACAACCTCAAGCT-3′) (SEQ ID No 2), P3 (5′-CATGGTACCCATTCTAAC-3′) (SEQ ID No 3), P4 (5′-TACCCATTCTAACCAAGC-3′) (SEQ ID No 4) and P5 (5′-CTAGGTACCTACAACCTC-3′) (SEQ ID No 5) were synthesized on a oligonucleotide synthesizer (Applied Biosystems, model 380B).
- Double stranded DNA tags were prepared from RT1 in a 100 ⁇ l volume PCR containing 1.5 mM MgCl 2 , 50 mM KCl, and 10 mM Tris-Cl (pH 8.0) with 200 pg of RT1 as target; 250 ⁇ M each dATP, dCTP, dGTP, dTTP; 100 pM of primers P3 and P5; and 2.5 U of Amplitaq (Perkin-Elmer Cetus). Thermal cycling conditions were 30 cycles of 95.degree. C. for 30 s, 50° C. for 45 s, and 72° C. for 10 s.
- PCR product was gel purified (Sambrook et al, 1989), passed through an elutipD column (available from Schleicher and Schull) and digested with KpnI prior to ligation into pUC18 or pUTmini-Tn5Km2.
- plasmids were digested with KpnI and dephosphorylated with calf intestinal alkaline phosphatase (Gibco-BRL).
- Linearized plasmid molecules were gel-purified (Sambrook et al, 1989) prior to ligation to remove any residual uncut plasmid DNA from the digestion.
- Ligation reactions contained approximately 50 ng each of plasmid and double stranded tag DNA in a 25 ⁇ l volume with 1 unit T4 DNA ligase (Gibco-BRL) in a buffer supplied with the enzyme.
- Ligations were carried out for 2 h at 24° C. To determine the proportion of bacterial colonies arising from either self ligation of the plasmid DNA or uncut plasmid DNA, a control reaction was carried out in which the double stranded tag DNA was omitted from the ligation reaction. This yielded no ampicillin resistant bacterial colonies following transformation of E. coli CC118 (Sambrook et al, 1989), compared with 185 colonies arising from a ligation reaction containing the double stranded tag DNA.
- E. coli CC118 The products of several ligations between pUT mini-Tn5Km2 and the double stranded tag DNA were used to transform E. coli CC118 (Sambrook et al, 1989). A total of approximately 10,300 transformants were pooled and plasmid DNA extracted from the pool was used to transform E. coli S-17 lambdapir (de Lorenzo & Timmis, 1994). For mating experiments, a pool of approximately 40,000 ampicillin resistant E. coli S-17 lambdapir transformants, and S. typhimurium 12023 Nal r were cultured separately to an optical density (OD) 580 of 1.0.
- OD optical density
- Each exconjugant was checked by transferring nalidixic acid resistant (nal r ), kanamycin resistant (kan r ) colonies to MacConkey Lactose indicator medium (to distinguish between E. coli and S. typhimurium ), and to LB medium containing ampicillin. Approximately 90% of the nal r , kan r colonies were sensitive to ampicillin, indicating that these resulted from authentic transposition events (de Lorenzo & Timmis, 1994). Individual ampicillin-sensitive exconjugants were stored in 96 well microtitre dishes containing LB medium. For long term storage at ⁇ 80° C., either 7% DMSO or 15% glycerol was included in the medium.
- Mutants were replica plated from microtitre dishes onto solid medium containing M9 salts and 0.4% glucose (Sambrook et al, 1989) to identify auxotrophs. Mutants with rough colony morphology were detected by low magnification microscopy of colonies on agar plates.
- a 48-well metal replicator (Sigma) was used to transfer exconjugants from microtitre dishes to Hybond N nylon filters (Amersham, UK) that had been placed on the surface of LB agar containing 50 ⁇ g ml ⁇ 1 kanamycin. After overnight incubation at 37° C., the filters supporting the bacterial colonies were removed and dried at room temperature for 10 min. The bacteria were lysed with 0.4 N NaOH and the filters washed with 0.5 N Tris-Cl pH 7.0 according to the filter manufacturer's instructions. The bacterial DNA was fixed to the filters by exposure to UV light from a Stratalinker (Stratagene).
- Hybridisations to 32 P-labelled probes were carried out under stringent conditions as previously described (Holden et al, 1989).
- S. typhimurium transposon mutant strains were grown in liquid LB medium in microtitre dishes or resuspended in LB medium following growth on solid media.
- Total DNA was prepared by the hexadecyltrimethylammoniumbromide (CTAB) method according to Ausubel et al (1987). Briefly, cells from 150 to 1000 ⁇ l volumes were precipitated by centrifugation and resuspended in 576 ⁇ l TE. To this was added 15 ⁇ l of 20% SDS and 3 ⁇ l of 20 mg ml ⁇ 1 proteinase K.
- CTCAB hexadecyltrimethylammoniumbromide
- the DNA samples were subjected to two rounds of PCR to generate labelled probes.
- the first PCR was performed in 100 ⁇ l reactions containing 20 mM Tris-Cl pH 8.3; 50 mM KCl; 2 mM MgCl2; 0.01% Tween 80; 200 ⁇ M each dATP, dCTP, dGTP, dTTP; 2.5 units of Amplitaq polymerase (Perkin-Elmer Cetus); 770 ng each primer P2 and P4; and 5 ⁇ g target DNA. After an initial denaturation of 4 min at 95.degree. C., thermal cycling consisted of 20 cycles of 45 s at 50° C., 10 s at 72° C., and 30 s at 95° C.
- PCR products were extracted with chloroform/isoamyl alcohol (24/1) and precipitated with ethanol. DNA was resuspended in 10 .mu.l TE and the PCR products were purified by electrophoresis through a 1.6% Seaplaque (FMC Bioproducts) gel in TAE buffer. Gel slices containing fragments of about 80 bp were excised and used for the second PCR.
- This reaction was carried out in a 20 .mu.l total volume, and contained 20 mM Tris-Cl pH 8.3; 50 mM KCl; 2 mM MgCl 2 ; 0.01% Tween 80; 50 ⁇ M each dATP, dTTP, dGTP; 10 ⁇ l 32 P-dCTP (3000 Ci/mmol, Amersham); 150 ng each primer P2 and P4; approximately 10 ng of target DNA (1-2 ⁇ l of 1.6% Seaplaque agarose containing the first round PCR product); 0.5 units of Amplitaq polymerase.
- the reaction was overlayed with 20 .mu.l mineral oil and thermal cycling was performed as described above. Incorporation of the radioactive label was quantitated by absorbance to Whatman DE81 paper (Sambrook et al, 1989).
- the culture was diluted in sterile saline to approximately 5 ⁇ 10 5 cfu ml ⁇ 1 . Further dilutions were plated out onto TYGPN containing nalidixic acid (100 mg ml ⁇ 1 ) and kanamycin (50 mg ml ⁇ 1 ) to confirm the cfu present in the inoculum.
- mice Groups of three female BALB/c mice (20-25 g) were injected intraperitoneally with 0.2 ml of bacterial suspension containing approximately 1 ⁇ 10 5 cfu ml ⁇ 1 . Mice were sacrificed three days post-inoculation and their spleens were removed to recover bacteria. Half of each spleen was homogenized in 1 ml of sterile saline in a microfuge tube. Cellular debris was allowed to settle and 1 ml of saline containing cells still in suspension was removed to a fresh tube and centrifuged for two minutes in a microfuge. The supernatant was aspirated and the pellet resuspended in 1 ml of sterile distilled water.
- a dilution series was made in sterile distilled water and 100 ml of each dilution was plated onto TYGPN agar containing nalidixic acid (100 ⁇ g ml ⁇ 1 ) and kanamycin (50 ug ml ⁇ 1 ). Bacteria were recovered from plates containing between 1000 and 4000 colonies, and a total of over 10,000 colonies recovered from each spleen were pooled and used to prepare DNA for PCR generation of probes to screen colony blots.
- Total DNA was isolated from S. typhimurium exconjugants and digested separately with SstI, SalI, PstI and SphI. Digests were fractionated through agarose gels, transferred to Hybond N + membranes (Amersham) and subjected to Southern hybridisation analysis using the kanamycin resistance gene of pUT mini-Tn5Km2 as a probe. The probe was labelled with digoxygenin (Boehringer-Mannheim) and chemiluminescence detection was carried out according to the manufacturer's instructions. The hybridisation and washing conditions were as described above.
- Restriction enzymes which gave rise to hybridising fragments in the 3-5 kb range were used to digest DNA for a preparative agarose gel, and DNA fragments corresponding to the sizes of the hybridisation signals were excised from this, purified and ligated into pUC18. Ligation reactions were used to transform E. coli DH5a to kanamycin resistance. Plasmids from kanamycin-resistant transformants were purified by passage through an elutipD column and checked by restriction enzyme digestion.
- Plasmid inserts were partially sequenced by the di-deoxy method (Sanger et al, 1977) using the -40 primer and reverse sequencing primer (United States Biochemical Corporation) and the primers P6 (5′-CCTAGGCGGCCAGATCTGAT-3′) (SEQ ID No 6) and P7 (5′GCACTTGTGTATAAGAGTCAG-3′) (SEQ ID No 7) which anneal to the I and O termini of Tn5, respectively.
- Nucleotide sequences and deduced amino acid sequences were assembled using the Macvector 3.5 software package run on a Macintosh SE/30 computer. Sequences were compared with the EMBL and Genbank DNA databases using the UNIX/SUN computer system at the Human Genome Mapping Project Resource Centre, Harrow, UK.
- Each tag consists of a variable central region flanked by “arms”, of invariant sequence.
- the central region sequence [NK] 20 ) was designed to prevent the occurrence of sites for the commonly used 6 bp-recognition restriction enzymes, but is sufficiently variable to ensure that statistically, the same sequence should only occur once in 2 ⁇ 10 11 molecules (DNA sequencing of 12 randomly selected tags showed that none shared more than 50% identity over the variable region).
- the arms contain KpnI sites close to the ends to facilitate the initial cloning step, and the HindIII sites bordering the variable region were used to release radiolabelled variable regions from the arms prior to hybridisation analysis.
- the arms were also designed such that primers P2 and P4 each contain only one guanine residue. Therefore during a PCR using these primers, only one cytosine will be incorporated into each newly synthesised arm, compared to an average of ten in the unique sequence. When radiolabelled dCTP is included in the PCR, an average of ten-fold more label will be present in the unique sequence compared with each arm.
- Double stranded tags were ligated into the KpnI site of the mini-Tn5 transposon Km2, carried on plasmid pUT (de Lorenzo & Timmis, 1994). Replication of this plasmid is dependent on the R6K-specified .pi. product of the pir gene. It carries the oriT sequence of the RP4 plasmid, permitting transfer to a variety of bacterial species (Miller & Mekalanos, 1988), and the tnp gene needed for transposition of the mini-Tn5 element. The tagged mini-Tn5 transposons were transferred to S.
- FIG. 3 shows that the hybridisation conditions employed were sufficiently stringent to prevent cross-hybridisation among labelled tags, and suggests that each exconjugant is not reiterated within a microtitre dish.
- a total of 1152 uniquely tagged insertion mutants were tested for virulence in BALB/c mice in twelve pools, each representing a 96-well microtitre dish.
- Animals received an intraperitoneal injection of approximately 10 3 cells of each of 96 transposon mutants of a microtitre dish (10 5 organisms in total).
- Three days after injection mice were sacrificed, and bacteria were recovered by plating spleen homogenates onto laboratory medium. Approximately 10,000 colonies recovered from each mouse were pooled and DNA was extracted.
- the tags present in this DNA sample were amplified and labelled by the PCR, and colony blots probed and compared with the hybridisation pattern obtained using tags amplified from the inoculum ( FIG. 3 ).
- an aroA mutant of S. typhimurium was tagged and employed as one of the 96 mutants in the inoculum. This strain would not be expected to be recovered in the spleen because its virulence is severely attenuated (Buchmeier et al, 1993). Forty-one mutants were identified whose DNA hybridized to labelled tags from the inoculum but not from labelled tags from bacteria recovered from the spleen. The experiment was repeated and the same forty-one mutants were again identified. Two of these were the aroa mutant (one per pool), as expected. Another was an auxotrophic mutant (it failed to grow on minimal medium). All of the mutants had normal colony morphology.
- DNA was extracted from one of the mutants described in Example 1 (Pool 1, F10), digested with SstI, and subcloned on the basis of kanamycin resistance.
- the sequence of 450 bp flanking one end of the transposon was determined using primer P7.
- This sequence shows 80% identity to the E. coli clp (Ion) gene, which encodes a heat-regulated protease ( FIG. 5 ; SEQ ID NOS 39 and 40). To our knowledge, this gene has not previously been implicated as a virulence determinant.
- Partial sequences of thirteen further Salmonella typhimurium virulence genes are shown in FIG. 6 (sequences A2 to A9 and B1 to B5; SEQ ID NOS 8-36).
- Deduced amino acid sequences of P2D6, S4C3, P3F4, P7G2 and P9B7 bear similarities to a family of secretion-associated proteins that have been conserved throughout bacterial pathogens of animals and plants, and which are known in Salmonella as the inv family.
- the inv genes are required for bacterial invasion into intestinal tissue. The virulence of inv mutants is attenuated when they are inoculated by the oral route, but not when they are administered intraperitoneally.
- inv-related genes that are required for virulence following intraperitoneal inoculation suggests a new secretion apparatus which might be required for invasion of non-phagocytic cells of the spleen and other organs.
- the products of these new genes might represent better drug targets than the inv proteins in the treatment of established infections.
- Mutations identified by the method of the invention attenuate virulence.
- mutant P1F10 No difference in the LD 50 was detected for mutant P1F10; however, there was a statistically significant decrease in the proportion of P1F10 cells recovered from the spleens of mice injected with an inoculum consisting of an equal proportion of this strain and the wild-type strain. This implies that this mutation does attenuate virulence, but to a degree that is not detectable by LD 50 .
- Mutants P3F4 and P9B7 were also administered by the oral route at an inoculum level of 10 7 cells/mouse. None of the mice became ill, indicating that the oral LD 50 levels of these mutants are at least an order of magnitude higher than that of the wild-type strain.
- mice In the mouse vaccination study groups of five female BALB/c mice of 20-25 g in mass were initially inoculated orally (p.o.) or intraperitoneally (i.p.) with serial ten fold dilutions of Salmonella typhimurium mutant strains P3F4 and P9B7. After four weeks the mice were then inoculated with 500 c.f.u. of the parental wild type strain. Deaths were then recorded over four weeks.
- mice of the same age and batch as the mice inoculated with the mutant strains were also inoculated i.p. with 500 c.f.u. of the wild type strain as a positive control. Both non-immunised mice died as expected within four weeks.
- results are tabulated below: initial inoculum in no. mice surviving no. mice survivin#g c.f.u. first challenge wild type challenge 1) p.o. initial inoculation with mutant strain P3F4 5 ⁇ 10 9 5 2 (40%) 5 ⁇ 10 8 5 2 (40%) 5 ⁇ 10 7 5 0 (0%) 2) i.p. initial inoculum with mutant strain P3F4 5 ⁇ 10 6 3 3 (100%) 5 ⁇ 10 5 5 4 (80%) 5 ⁇ 10 4 6 5 (83%) 5 ⁇ 10 3 5 4 (80%) 3) p.o. initial inoculum with mutant strain P9B7 5 ⁇ 10 9 5 0 (0%) 4) i.p. initial inoculum with mutant P9B7 5 ⁇ 10 6 4 2 (50%)
- mutant P3P4 appears to give some protection against subsequent wild type challenge. This protection appears greater in mice that were immunised i.p.
- VGC1 virulence gene cluster 1
- VGC2 virulence gene cluster 2.
- Salmonella typhimurium is a principal agent of gastroenteritis in humans and produces a systemic illness in mice which serves as a model for human typhoid fever (1).
- the bacteria pass from the lumen of the small intestine through the intestinal mucosa, via enterocytes or M cells of the Peyer's patch follicles (2).
- the bacteria then invade macrophages and neutrophils, enter the reticuloendothelial system and disseminate to other organs, including the spleen and liver, where further reproduction results in an overwhelming and fatal bacteremia (3).
- S. typhimurium employs a sophisticated repertoire of virulence factors (4).
- Example 1 To gain a more comprehensive understanding of virulence mechanisms of S. typhimurium and other pathogens the transposon mutagenesis system described in Example 1, which is conveniently called ‘signature-tagged mutagenesis’ (STM), which combines the strength of mutational analysis with the ability to follow simultaneously the fate of a large number of different mutants within a single animal (5 and Example 1; Reference 5 was published after the priority date for this invention).
- STM signature-tagged mutagenesis
- the products of the inv/spa gene cluster of S. typhimurium (8, 9) are proteins that form a type III secretion system required for the assembly of surface appendages mediating entry into epithelial cells (10).
- the virulence of strains carrying mutations in the inv/spa cluster is attenuated only if the inoculum is administered orally and not when given intraperitoneally (8).
- the 5 mutants identified by STM are avirulent following intraperitoneal inoculation (5).
- VCC2 virulence gene cluster 2
- Salmonella enterica serotypes 5791 (aberdeen), 423180 (gallinarum), 7101 (cubana) and 12416 ( typhimurium LT2) were obtained from the National Collections of Type Cultures, Public Health Laboratory Service, UK.
- Salmonella typhi BRD123 genomic DNA was a gift from G. Dougan, enteropathogenic Escherichia coli (EPEC), enterohemorrhagic E. coli (EHEC), Vibrio cholera biotype El Tor, Shigella flexneri serotype 2 and Staphylococcus aureus were clinical isolates obtained from the Department of Infectious Diseases and Bacteriology, Royal Postgraduate Medical School, UK.
- Genomic DNA from Yersinia pestis was a gift from J. Heesemann. However, genomic DNA can be isolated using standard methods. The bacterial strains and the methods used to generate signature-tagged mini-Tn5 transposon mutants of S. typhimurium NCTC strain 12023 have been described previously (5, 11). Routine propagation of plasmids was in E. coli DH5.alpha. Bacteria were grown in LB broth (12) supplemented with the appropriate antibiotics. Before virulence levels of individual mutant strains were assessed, the mutations were first transferred by phage P22 mediated transduction (12) to the nalidixic acid sensitive parental strain of S. typhimurium 12023. Transductants were analysed by restriction digestion and Southern hybridisation before use as inoculum.
- Lambda Library Screening Lambda (lambda) clones with overlapping insert DNAs covering VGC2 were obtained by standard methods (13) from a lambda1059 library (14) containing inserts from a partial Sau3A digest of S. typhimurium LT2 genomic DNA.
- the library was obtained via K. Sanderson, from the Salmonella Genetic Stock Centre (SGSC), Calgary, Canada.
- Mud-P22 Lysogens Radiolabelled DNA probes were hybridised to Hybond N (Amersham) filters bearing DNA prepared from lysates of a set of S. typhimurium strains harbouring Mud-P22 prophages at known positions in the S. typhimurium genome. Preparation of mitomycin-induced Mud-P22 lysates was as described (12, 15). The set of Mud-P22 prophages was originally assembled by Benson and Goldman (16) and was obtained from the SGSC.
- DNA fragments used as probes were labelled with [ 32 P]dCTP using the ‘Radprime’ system (Gibco-BRL) or with [digoxigenin-11]dUTP and detected using the Digoxigenin system (Boehringer Mannheim) according to the manufacturers' instructions, except that hybridisation was performed in the same solution as that used for radioactively labelled probes. Genomic DNA was prepared for Southern hybridisation as described previously (13).
- mice Groups of five female BALB/c mice (20-25 g) were inoculated orally (p.o.) or intraperitoneally (i.p.) with 10-fold dilutions of bacteria suspended in physiological saline.
- bacteria were grown overnight at 37° C. in LB broth with shaking (50 rpm) and then used to inoculate fresh medium for various lengths of time until an optical density (OD) at 560 nm of 0.4 to 0.6 had been reached.
- OD optical density
- the concentration of cfu/ml was checked by plating a dilution series of the inoculum onto LB agar plates. Mice were inoculated i.p. with 0.2 ml volumes and p.o. by gavage with the same volume of inoculum. The LD 50 values were calculated after 28 days by the method of Reed and Meunch (21).
- Transposons and flanking DNA regions were cloned from exconjugants by selection for kanamycin resistance or by inverse PCR. Nucleotide sequences of 300-600 bp of DNA flanking the transposons were obtained for 33 mutants.
- Hybridising DNA fragments showed that several lambda clones overlap and that clusters A, B and C comprise one contiguous region ( FIG. 8 ). DNA fragments from the ends of this region were then used to probe the lambda library to identify further clones containing inserts representing the adjacent regions. No lambda clones were identified that covered the extreme right hand terminus of the locus so this region was obtained by cloning a 6.5 kb EcoRI/XbaI fragment from a lysate of the Mud-P22 prophage strain TT15244 (16).
- FIG. 8 shows the position of two portions of DNA whose nucleotide sequence has been determined (“Sequence 1” and “Sequence 2”). The nucleotide sequence is shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 . Mapping the boundaries of VGC2 on the S. typhimurium chromosome.
- Nucleotide sequencing of lambda clone 7 at the left hand side of VGC2 revealed the presence of an open reading frame (ORF) whose deduced amino acid sequence is over 90% identical to the derived product of a segment of the ydhE.dagger-dbl. gene of E. coli and sequencing of the 6.5 kb EcoRI/XbaI cloned fragment on the right hand side of VGC2 revealed the presence of an ORF whose predicted amino acid sequence is over 90% identical to pyruvate kinase I of E. coli encoded by the pykF gene (27).
- ORF open reading frame
- coli chromosome ydhE and pykF are located close to one another, at minute 37 to 38 (28). Eleven non-overlapping DNA fragments distributed along the length of VGC2 were used as probes in non-stringent Southern hybridisation analysis of E. coli and S. typhimurium genomic DNA. Hybridising DNA fragments showed that a region of approximately 40 kb comprising VGC2 was absent from the E. coli genome and localised the boundaries of VGC2 to within 1 kb ( FIG. 9 ). Comparison of the location of the XbaI site close to the right hand end of VGC2 ( FIG. 8 ) with a map of known XbaI sites (29) at the minute 30 region of the chromosome (22) enables a map position of 30.7 minutes to be deduced for VGC2.
- VGC2 Nucleotide sequencing of portions of VGC2 has revealed the presence of 19 ORFs ( FIG. 8 ). The G+C content of approximately 26 kb of nucleotide sequence within VGC2 is 44.6%, compared to 47% for VGC1 (9) and 51-53% estimated for the entire Salmonella genome (30).
- ORFs 1-11 are similar to those of proteins of type III secretion systems (6, 7), which are known to be required for the export of virulence determinants in a variety of bacterial pathogens of plants and animals (7).
- the predicted proteins of ORFs 1-8 ( FIG. 8 ) are similar in organisation and sequence to the products of the yscN-U genes of Yersinia pseudotuberculosis (31), to invC/spaS of the inv/spa cluster in VGC 1 of Salmonella typhimurium (8, 9) and to spa47/spa40 of the spa/mxi cluster of Shigella flexneri (32, 33, 34, 35,).
- the predicted amino acid sequence of ORF 3 ( FIG. 8 ) is 50% identical to YscS of Y. pseudotuberculosis (31), 34% identical to Spa9 from S. flexneri (35) and 37% identical to SpaQ of VGC 1 of S. typhimurium (9).
- the predicted protein product of ORF9 is closely related to the LcrD family of proteins with 43% identity to LcrD of Y. enterocolitica (36), 39% identity to MxiA of S. flexneri (32) and 40% identity to InvA of VGC1 (23). Partial nucleotide sequences for the remaining ORFs shown in FIG. 8 indicate that the predicted protein from ORF10 is most similar to Y.
- enterocolitica YscJ (37) a lipoprotein located in the bacterial outer membrane, with ORF 11 similar to S. typhimurium InvG, a member of the PulD family of translocases (38).
- ORF12 and ORF13 show significant similarity to the sensor and regulatory subunits respectively, from a variety of proteins comprising two component regulatory systems (39). There is ample coding capacity for further genes between ORFs 9 and 10, ORFs 10 and 11, and between ORF 19 and the right hand end of VGC2.
- VGC2 is conserved among and is specific to the Salmonellae.
- a 2.2 kb PstI/HindIII fragment located at the centre of VGC2 (probe B, FIG. 8 ) lacking sequence similarity to entries in the DNA and protein databases was used as a probe in Southern hybridisation analysis of genomic DNA from Salmonella serovars and other pathogenic bacteria ( FIG. 10A ).
- DNA fragments hybridising under non-stringent conditions showed that VGC2 is present in S. aberdeen, S. gallinarum, S. cubana, S. typhi and is absent from EPEC, EHEC, Y. pestis, S. flexneri, V cholera and S. aureus .
- VGC2 is conserved among and is likely to be specific to the Salmonellae.
- VGC2 is required for virulence in mice.
- Previous experiments showed that the LD 50 values for i.p. inoculation of transposon mutants P3F4, P7G2, P9B7 and P 11C3 were at least 100-fold greater than the wild type strain (5).
- the p.o. and i.p. LD 50 values for mutants P3F4 and P9B7 were determined (Table 1). Both mutants showed a reduction in virulence of at least five orders of magnitude by either route of inoculation in comparison with the parental strain.
- VGC2 virulence gene cluster 2
- RF333 may correspond to VGC2, although it was not known that RF333 was involved in virulence determination.
- VGC2 encodes the basic structural components of the secretory apparatus. Furthermore, the order of ORFs 1-8 in VGC2 is the same as the gene order in homologues in Yersinia, Shigella and VGC1 of S. typhimurium . The fact that the organisation and structure of the VGC2 secretion system is no more closely related to VGC1 than to the corresponding genes of Yersinia , together with the low G+C content of VGC2 suggests that VGC2, like VGC1 (40, 41, 42) was acquired independently by S. typhimurium via horizontal transmission. The proteins encoded by ORFs 12 and 13 show strong similarity to bacterial two component regulators (39) and could regulate either ORFs 1-11 and/or the secreted proteins of this system.
- VGC1 genes in VGC1 have been shown to be important for entry of S. typhimurium into epithelial cells. This process requires bacterial contact (2) and results in cytoskeletal rearrangements leading to localised membrane ruffling (43, 44).
- the role of VGC1 and its restriction to this stage of the infection is reflected in the approximately 50-fold attenuation of virulence in BALB/c mice inoculated p.o. with VGC1 mutants and by the fact that VGC1 mutants show no loss of virulence when administered i.p. (8).
- the second observation also explains why no VGC1 mutants were obtained in our screen (5).
- mutants in VGC2 are profoundly attenuated following both p.o. and i.p. inoculation. This shows that, unlike VGC1, VGC2 is required for virulence in mice after epithelial cell penetration, but these findings do not exclude a role for VGC1 in this early stage of infection.
- VGC2 has a lower G+C content than that of the Salmonella genome and is flanked by genes whose products share greater than 90% identity with those of the E. coli ydhE and pykF genes. Thus VGC2 was probably acquired horizontally by insertion into a region corresponding to that between the ydhe and pykF genes of E. coli . Virulence studies of VGC2 mutants have shown them to be attenuated by at least five orders of magnitude compared with the wild type strain following oral or intraperitoneal inoculation.
- Random S. pneumoniae DNA fragments of 200-400 bp will be generated by genomic DNA digestion with a restriction enzyme or by physical shearing by sonication followed by gel fractionation and DNA end-repair using T4 DNA polymerase. The fragments are ligated into plasmid pJDC9 (Pearce et al (1993) Mol. Microbiol. 9, 1037 which carries the erm gene for erythromycin selection in E. coli and S.
- S. pneumoniae previously modified by incorporation of DNA sequence tags into one of the polylinker cloning sites.
- the size of cloned S. pneumoniae DNA is sufficient to ensure homologous recombination, and reduces the possibility of generating an unrepresentative library in E. coli (expression of S. pneumoniae proteins can be toxic to E. coli ).
- Alternative vectors carrying different selectable markers are available and can be used in place of pJDC9.
- Tagged plasmids carrying DNA fragments are introduced to an appropriate S. pneumoniae strain selected on the basis of serotype and virulence in a murine model of pneumococcal pneumonia. Regulation of competence for genetic transformation in S.
- pneumoniae is governed by competence factor, a peptide of 17 amino acids which has been characterized recently by Don Morrison's group at the University of Illinois at Chicago and which is described Havarstein, Coomaraswamy and Morrison (1995) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 92, 11140-11144. Incorporation of minute quantities of this peptide in transformation experiments leads to very efficient transformation frequencies in some encapsulated clinical isolates of S. pneumoniae . This overcomes a major hurdle in pneumococcal molecular genetics and the availability of the peptide greatly facilitates the construction of S. pneumoniae mutant banks and allows flexibility in choosing the strain(s) to be mutated.
- a proportion of transformants are analysed to verify homologous integration of the plasmid sequences, and checked for stability.
- the very low level of reversion associated with mutants generated by insertion-duplication is minimized by the fact that the duplicated regions will be short (200-400 bp); however if the level of reversion is unacceptably high, antibiotic selection is maintained during growth of the transformants in culture and during growth in the animal.
- the S. pneumoniae mutant bank is organized into pools for inoculation into Swiss and/or C57B1/6 mice. Preliminary experiments are conducted to determine the optimum complexity of the pools and the optimum inoculum level.
- One attractive model utilises inocula of 10 5 cfu, delivered by mouth to the trachea (Veber et al (1993) J. Antimicrobial Chemotherapy 32, 473).
- Swiss mice develop acute pneumonia within 3-4 days
- C57B1/6 mice develop subacute pneumonia within 8-10 days.
- These pulmonary models of infection yield 10 8 cfu/lung (Veber et al (1993) J. Antimicrobial Chemotherapy 32, 473) at the time of death.
- mice are also injected intraperitoneally for the identification of genes required for bloodstream infection (Sullivan et al (1993) Antimicrobial Agents and Chemotherapy 37, 234).
- a mutant bank consisting of several thousand strains is subjected to virulence tests. Mutants with attenuated virulence are identified by hybridisation analysis, using labelled tags from the ‘input’ and ‘recovered’ pools as probes. If S. pneumoniae DNA cannot be colony blotted easily, chromosomal DNA is liberated chemically or enzymatically in the wells of microtitre dishes prior to transfer onto nylon membranes using a dot-blot apparatus. DNA flanking the integrated plasmid is cloned by plasmid rescue in E. coli (Morrison et al (1984) J. Bacteriol. 159, 870), and sequenced.
- Genomic DNA libraries are constructed in appropriate vectors maintained in either E. coli or a Gram-positive host strain, and are probed with restriction fragments flanking the integrated plasmid to isolate cloned virulence genes which is then fully sequenced and subjected to detailed functional analysis.
- Mutagenesis of E. faecalis is accomplished using plasmid pAT112 or a derivative, developed for this purpose.
- pAT112 carries genes for selection in both Gram-negative and Gram-positive bacteria, and the att site of Tn1545. It therefore requires the presence in the host strain of the integrase for transposition, and stable, single copy insertions are obtained if the host does not contain an excisionase gene (Trieu-Cuot et al (1991) Gene 106, 21).
- Recovery of DNA flanking the integrated plasmid is accomplished by restriction digestion of genomic DNA, intramolecular ligation and transformation of E. coli .
- a large number of insertion mutants are analysed for random integration of the plasmid by isolating DNA from transcipients, restriction enzyme digestion and Southern hybridisation. Individual mutants are stored in the wells of microtitre dishes, and complexity and size of pooled inocula are optimised prior to screening of the mutant bank.
- Two different models of infection caused by E. faecalis are employed. The first is a well established rat model of endocarditis, involving tail vein injection of up to 10 8 cfu of E. faecalis into animals that have a catheter inserted across the aortic valve (Whitman et al (1993) Antimicrobial Agents and Chemotherapy 37, 1069).
- mice Animals are sacrificed at various times after inoculation, and bacterial vegetations on the aortic valve are excised, homogenized and plated to culture medium to recover bacterial colonies. Virulent bacteria are also recovered from the blood at various times after inoculation.
- the second model is of peritonitis in mice, following intraperitoneal injection of up to 10 9 cfu of E. faecalis (Chenoweth et al (1990) Antimicrobial Agents and Chemotherapy 34, 1800).
- preliminary experiments are done to establish the optimum complexity of the pools and the optimum inoculum level, prior to screening the mutant bank.
- transposon Tn5 has been used by others to mutagenise Pseudomonas aeruginosa
- mini-Tn5 derivative that was used for the identification of Salmonella typhimurium virulence genes (Example 1) is reported to have broad utilisation among Gram-negative bacteria, including several pseudomonads (DeLorenzo and Timaris (1994) Methods Enymol. 264, 386)
- a P. aeruginosa mutant bank is constructed using our existing pool of signature tagged mini-Tn5 transposons by conjugal transfer of the suicide vector to one or more virulent (and possibly mucoid) recipient strains. This approach represents a significant time saving.
- Other derivatives of Tn5 designed specifically for P. aeruginosa mutagenesis may alternatively be employed with the mini Tn5 transposon.
- the bank of P. aeruginosa insertion mutants is screened for attenuated virulence in a chronic pulmonary infection model in rats.
- Suspensions of P. aeruginosa cells are introduced into a bronchus following tracheotomy, and disease develops over a 30 day period (Woods et al (1982) Infect. Immun. 36, 1223).
- Bacteria are recovered by plating lung homogenates to laboratory medium and sequence tags from these are used to probe DNA colony blots of bacteria used as the inoculum.
- mutant bank it is also possible to subject the mutant bank to virulence tests in a model of endogenous bacteremia (Hirakata et al (1992) Antimicrobial Agents and Chemotherapy 36, 1198), and cystic fibrosis (Davidson et al (1995) Nature Genetics 9, 351) in mice. Cloning and sequencing of DNA flanking the transposons is done as described in Example 1. Genomic DNA libraries for the isolation and sequencing of intact copies of the genes are constructed in the laboratory by standard methods.
- the functional eqiuvalent of transposon mutagenesis in fungi is restriction enzyme mediated integration (REMI) of transforming DNA (Schiestl and Petes (1991) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 88, 7585).
- REMI restriction enzyme mediated integration
- fungal cells are transformed with DNA fragments carrying a selectable marker in the presence of a restriction enzyme, and single copy integrations occur at different genomic sites, defined by the target sequence of the restriction enzyme.
- REMI has already been used successfully to isolate virulence genes of Cochliobolus (Lu et al (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91, 12649) and Ustilago (Bolker et al (1995) Mol. Gen. Genet.
- Sequence tags are introduced into a convenient site in one of two vectors for hygromycin resistance, and used to transform a clinical isolate of A. fumigatus.
- mice The low-dose model of aspergillosis in neutropenic mice in particular closely matches the course of pulmonary disease in humans (Smith et al (1994) Infect. Immun. 62, 5247).
- Mice are inoculated intranasally with up to 1,000,000 conidiospores/mouse, and virulent fungal mutants are recovered 7-10 days later by using lung homogenates to inoculate liquid medium.
- Hyphae are collected after a few hours, from which DNA is extracted for amplification and labelling of tags to probe colony blots of DNA from the pool of transformants comprising the inoculum.
- DNA from the regions flanking the REMI insertion points are cloned by digesting the transformant DNA with a restriction enzyme that cuts outside the REMI vector, self ligation and transformation of E. coli .
- Primers based on the known sequence of the plasmid are used to determine the adjacent A. fumigatus DNA sequences.
- the recovered plasmid is recut with the same restriction enzyme used for cloning, and transformed back into the wild-type A. fumigatus parent strain. Transformants that have arisen by homologous recombination are then subjected to virulence tests.
- Salmonella typhimurium phoP virulence gene is a transcriptional regulator. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 86, 7077-7081.
Landscapes
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Zoology (AREA)
- Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
- Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Biotechnology (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Biochemistry (AREA)
- Biophysics (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
- Microbiology (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
- Plant Pathology (AREA)
- Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
- Bioinformatics & Computational Biology (AREA)
- Immunology (AREA)
- Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
- Virology (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Pulmonology (AREA)
- Oncology (AREA)
- Communicable Diseases (AREA)
- Mycology (AREA)
- Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
- Toxicology (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- This application is a divisional of pending application U.S. Ser. No. 09/714,602 filed Nov. 16, 2000 entitled “Identification of Genes” by David William Holden; which is a continuation of U.S. Ser. No. 09/201,945, filed Dec. 1, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 6,342,215, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 08/637,759, filed Jul. 19, 1997, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,876,931, which is a 371 of PCT/GB95/02875 filed Dec. 11, 1995. application Ser. No. 09/201,945, filed Dec. 1, 1998, and application Ser. No. 08/637,759, filed Jul. 19, 1997, are hereby incorporated herein by reference.
- The present invention relates to methods for the identification of genes involved in the adaptation of a microorganism to its environment, particularly the identification of genes responsible for the virulence of a pathogenic microorganism.
- Antibiotic resistance in bacterial and other pathogens is becoming increasingly important. It is therefore important to find new therapeutic approaches to attack pathogenic microorganisms.
- Pathogenic microorganisms have to evade the host's defence mechanisms and be able to grow in a poor nutritional environment to establish an infection. To do so a number of “virulence” genes of the microorganism are required.
- Virulence genes have been detected using classical genetics and a variety of approaches have been used to exploit transposon mutagenesis for the identification of bacterial virulence genes. For example, mutants have been screened for defined physiological defects, such as the loss of iron regulated proteins (Holland et al, 1992), or in assays to study the penetration of epithelial cells (Finlay et al, 1988) and survival within macrophages (Fields et al, 1989; Miller et al, 1989a; Groisman et al, 1989). Transposon mutants have also been tested for altered virulence in live animal models of infection (Miller et al, 1989b). This approach has the advantage that genes can be identified which are important during different stages of infection, but is severely limited by the need to test a wide range of mutants individually for alterations to virulence. Miller et al (1989b) used groups of 8 to 10 mice and infected orally 95 separate groups with a different mutant thereby using between 760 and 950 mice. Because of the extremely large numbers of animals required, comprehensive screening of a bacterial genome for virulence genes has not been feasible.
- Recently a genetic system (in vivo expression technology [IVET]) was described which positively selects for Salmonella genes that are specifically induced during infection (Mahan et al, 1993). The technique will identify genes that are expressed at a particular stage in the infection process. However, it will not identify virulence genes that are regulated posttranscriptionally, and more importantly, will not provide information on whether the gene(s) which have been identified are actually required for, or contribute to, the infection process.
- Lee & Falkow (1994) Methods EnymoL 236, 531-545 describe a method of identifying factors influencing the invasion of Salmonella into mammalian cells in vitro by isolating hyperinvasive mutants.
- Walsh and Cepko (1992) Science 255, 434-440 describe a method of tracking the spatial location of cerebral cortical progenitor cells during the development of the cerebral cortex in the rat. The Walsh and Cepko method uses a tag that contains a unique nucleic acid sequence and the lacZ gene but there is no indication that useful mutants or genes could be detected by their method.
- WO 94/26933 and Smith et al (1995) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 92, 6479-6483 describe methods aimed at the identification of the functional regions of a known gene, or at least of a DNA molecule for which some sequence information is available.
- Groisman et al (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90, 1033-1037 describes the molecular, functional and evolutionary analysis of sequences specific to Salmonella.
- Some virulence genes are already known for pathogenic microorganisms such as Escherichia coli, Salmonella typhimurium, Salmonella typhi, Vibrio cholerae, Clostridium botulinum, Yersinia pestis, Shigella flexneri and Listeria monocytogenes but in all cases only a relatively small number of the total have been identified.
- The disease which Salmonella typhimurium causes in mice provides a good experimental model of typhoid fever (Carter & Collins, 1974). Approximately forty two genes affecting Salmonella virulence have been identified to date (Groisman & Ochman, 1994). These represent approximately one third of the total number of predicted virulence genes (Groisman and Saier, 1990).
- The object of the present invention is to identify genes involved in the adaptation of a microorganism to its environment, particularly to identify further virulence genes in pathogenic microorganisms, with increased efficiency. A further object is to reduce the number of experimental animals used in identifying virulence genes. Still further objects of the invention provide vaccines, and methods for screening for drugs which reduce virulence.
- A first aspect of the invention provides a method for identifying a microorganism having a reduced adaptation to a particular environment comprising the steps of:
- (1) providing a plurality of microorganisms each of which is independently mutated by the insertional inactivation of a gene with a nucleic acid comprising a unique marker sequence so that each mutant contains a different marker sequence, or clones of the said microorganism;
- (2) providing individually a stored sample of each mutant produced by step (1) and providing individually stored nucleic acid comprising the unique marker sequence from each individual mutant;
- (3) introducing a plurality of mutants produced by step (1) into the said particular environment and allowing those microorganisms which are able to do so to grow in the said environment;
- (4) retrieving microorganisms from the said environment or a selected part thereof and isolating the nucleic acid from the retrieved microorganisms;
- (5) comparing any marker sequences in the nucleic acid isolated in step (4) to the unique marker sequence of each individual mutant stored as in step (2); and
- (6) selecting an individual mutant which does not contain any of the marker sequences as isolated in step (4).
- Thus, the method uses negative selection to identify microorganisms with reduced capacity to proliferate in the environment.
- A microorganism can live in a number of different environments and it is known that particular genes and their products allow the microorganism to adapt to a particular environment. For example, in order for a pathogenic microorganism, such as a pathogenic bacterium or pathogenic fungus, to survive in its host the product of one or more virulence genes is required. Thus, in a preferred embodiment of the invention a gene of a microorganism which allows the microorganism to adapt to a particular environment is a virulence gene.
- Conveniently, the particular environment is a differentiated multicellular organism such as a plant or animal. Many bacteria and fungi are known to infect plants and they are able to survive within the plant and cause disease because of the presence of and expression from virulence genes. Suitable microorganisms when the particular environment is a plant include the bacteria Agrobacterium tumefaciens which forms tumours (galls) particularly in grape; Erwinia amylovara; Pseudomonas solanacearum which causes wilt in a wide range of plants; Rhizobium leguminosarum which causes disease in beans; Xanthomonas campestris p. v. citri which causes canker in citrus fruits; and include the fungi Magnaporthe grisea which causes rice blast disease; Fusarium spp. which cause a variety of plant diseases; Erisyphe spp.; Colletotrichum gloeosporiodes; Gaeumannomyces graminis which causes root and crown diseases in cereals and grasses; Glomus spp., Laccaria spp.; Leptosphaeria maculans; Phoma tracheiphila; Phytophthora spp., Pyrenophora teres; Verticillium alboatrum and V. dahliae; and Mycosphaerella musicola and M. fijiensis. As described in more detail below, when the microorganism is a fungus a haploid phase to its life cycle is required.
- Similarly, many microorganisms including bacteria, fungi, protozoa and trypanosomes are known to infect animals, particularly mammals including humans. Survival of the microorganism within the animal and the ability of the microorganism to cause disease is due in large part to the presence of and expression from virulence genes. Suitable bacteria include Bordetella spp. particularly B. pertussis, Campylobacter spp. particularly C. jejuni, Clostridium spp. particularly C. botulinum, Enterococcus spp. particularly E. faecalis, Escherichia spp. particularly E. coli, Haemophilus spp. particularly H. ducreyi and H. influenzae, Helicobacter spp. particularly H. pylori, Klebsiella spp. particularly K. pneumoniae, Legionella spp. particularly L. pneumophila, Listeria spp. particularly L. monocytogenes, Mycobacterium spp. particularly M. smegmatis and M. tuberculosis, Neisseria spp. particularly N. gonorrhoeae and N. meningitidis, Pseudomonnas spp., particularly Ps. aeruginosa, Salmonella spp., Shigella spp., Staphylococcus spp. particularly S. aureus, Streptococcus spp. particularly S. pyogenes and pneumoniae, Vibrio spp. and Yersinia spp. particularly Y. pestis. All of these bacteria cause disease in man and also there are animal models of the disease. Thus, when these bacteria are used in the method of the invention, the particular environment is an animal which they can infect and in which they cause disease. For example, when Salmonella typhimunum is used to infect a mouse the mouse develops a disease which serves as a model for typhoid fever in man. Staphylococcus aureus causes bacteraemia and renal abscess formation in mice (Albus et al (1991) Infect. Immun. 59, 1008-1014) and endocarditis in rabbits (Perlman & Freedman (1971) Yale J. Biol. Med. 44, 206-213).
- It is required that a fungus or higher eukaryotic parasite is haploid for the relevant parts of its life (such as growth in the environment). Preferably, a DNA-mediated integrative transformation system is available and, when the microorganism is a human pathogen, conveniently an animal model of the human disease is available. Suitable fungi pathogenic to humans include certain Aspergillus spp. (for example A. fumigatus), Cryptococcus neoformans and Histoplasma capsulatum. Clearly the above-mentioned fungi have a haploid phase and a DNA-mediated integrative transformation systems are available for them. Toxoplasma may also be used, being a parasite with a haploid phase during infection. Bacteria have a haploid genome.
- Animal models of human disease are often available in which the animal is a mouse, rat, rabbit, dog or monkey. It is preferred if the animal is a mouse. Virulence genes detected by the method of the invention using an animal model of a human disease are clearly very likely to be genes which determine the virulence of the microorganism in man.
- Particularly preferred microorganisms for use in the methods of the invention are Salmonella typhimurium, Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Enterococcus faecalis, Pseudomonas aeruginosa and Aspergillus fumigatus.
-
FIGS. 1A and 1B illustrate diagrammatically one particularly preferred method of the invention. -
FIG. 2 shows a Southern hybridisation analysis of DNA from 12 S. typhimurium exconjugants following digestion with EcoRV. The filter was probed with the kanamycin resistance gene of the mini-Tn5 transposon. -
FIG. 3 shows a colony blot hybridisation analysis of DNA from 48 S. typhimurium exconjugants from a half of a microtitre dish (A1-H6). The filter was hybridised with a probe comprising labelled amplified tags from DNA isolated from a pool of the first 24 colonies (A1-D6). -
FIGS. 4A through 4D show a DNA colony blot hybridisation analysis of 95 S. typhimurium exconjugants of a microtitre dish (A1-H11), which were injected into a mouse. Replicate filters were hybridised with labelled amplified tags from the pool (inoculum pattern), or with labelled amplified tags from DNA isolated from over 10,000 pooled colonies that were recovered from the spleen of the infected animal (spleen pattern). -
FIGS. 5A through 5D show the sequence of a Salmonella gene isolated using the method of the invention and a comparison to the Escherichia coli clp protease (SEQ ID NOS 39 and 40. -
FIGS. 6A through 6H show partial sequences of further Salmonella gene isolated using the method of the invention (SEQ ID Nos. 8 to 36). -
FIGS. 7A and 7B show the mapping of VGC2 on the S. typhimurium chromosome. (A) DNA probes from three regions of VGC2 were used in Southern hybridisation analysis of lysates from a set of S. typhimurium strains harbouring locked in Mud-P22 prophages. Lysates which hybridised to a 7.5 kb PstI fragment (probe A inFIG. 8 ) are shown. The other two probes used hybridised to the same lysates. (B) The insertion points and packaging directions of the phage are shown along with the map position in minutes (edition VIII, ref 22 in Example 4). The phage designations correspond to the following strains: 18P, TT15242; 18Q, 15241; 19P, TT15244; 19Q, TT15243; 20P, TT15246 and 20Q, TT15245 (Ref in Example 4). The locations of mapped genes are shown by horizontal bars and the approximate locations of other genes are indicated. -
FIGS. 8A, 8B , and 8C show a physical and genetic map of VGC2. (A) The positions of 16 transposon insertions are shown above the line. The extent of VGC2 is indicated by the thicker line. The position and direction of transcription of ORFs described in the text of Example 4 are shown by arrows below the line, together with the names of similar genes, with the exception ofORFs FIG. 7 and that of the 2.2 kb PstI/HindIII fragment (probe B) used as a probe inFIG. 10 are shown below the restriction map. The positions of Sequence 1 (described inFIG. 11 ) and Sequence 2 (described inFIG. 12 ) are shown by the thin arrows (labelledSequence 1 and Sequence 2). -
FIG. 9 describes mapping the boundaries of VGC2. (A) The positions of mapped genes atminutes 37 to 38 on the E. coli K12 chromosome are aligned with the corresponding region of the S. typhimurium LT2 chromosome (minutes 30 to 31). An expanded map of the VGC2 region is shown with 11 S. typhimurium (S. t.) DNA fragments used as probes (thick bars) and the restriction sites used to generate them: B, BamHI; C, ClaI; H, HindII; K, KpnI; P, PstI; N, NsiI and S, SalI. Probes that hybridised to E. coli K12 (E. c.) genomic DNA are indicated by +; those which failed to hybridise are indicated by −. -
FIGS. 10A and 10B show that VGC2 is conserved among and specific to the Salmonellae. Genomic DNA from Salmonella serovars and other pathogenic bacteria was restricted with PstI (A), HindII or EcoRV (B) and subjected to Southern hybridisation analysis, using a 2.2 kb PstI/HindIII fragment fromlambda clone 7 as a probe (probe BFIG. 2 ). The filters were hybridised and washed under stringent (A) or non-stringent (B) conditions. - FIGS. 11A through 11BW show the DNA sequence of “
Sequence 1” of VGC2 from the centre to the left-hand end (see the arrow labelledSequence 1 inFIG. 8 ). The DNA is translated in three forward reading frames (the amino acid sequences in the “a” reading frame are SEQ ID Nos. 45-187, the amino acid sequences in the “b” reading frame are SEQ ID Nos. 188-356, and the amino acid sequences in the “c” reading frame are SEQ ID Nos. 357-501) and the start and stop positions of putative genes and the transposon insertion positions for various mutants identified by STM are indicated (SEQ ID No 37). As is conventional a * indicates a stop codon and standard nucleotide ambiguity codes are used where necessary. -
FIGS. 12A through 12P show the DNA sequence of “Sequence 2” of VGC2 (cluster C) (see the arrow labelledSequence 2 inFIG. 8 ). The start and stop positions of putative genes, and the transposon insertion positions for various mutants identified by STM are indicated (SEQ ID No 38). As is conventional a * indicates a stop codon and standard nucleotide ambiguity codes are used where necessary. - A preferred embodiment of the invention is now described.
- A nucleic acid comprising a unique marker sequence is made as follows. A complex pool of double stranded DNA sequence “tags” is generated using oligonucleotide synthesis and a polymerase chain reaction (PCR). Each DNA “tag” has a unique sequence of between about 20 and 80 bp, preferably about 40 bp which is flanked by “arms” of about 15 to 30 bp, preferably about 20 bp, which are common to all “tags”. The number of bp in the unique sequence is sufficient to allow large numbers (for example >1010) of unique sequences to be generated by random oligonucleotide synthesis but not too large to allow the formation of secondary structures which may interfere with a PCR. Similarly, the length of the arms should be sufficient to allow efficient priming of oligonucleotides in a PCR.
- It is well known that the sequence at the 5′ end of the oligonucleotide need not match the target sequence to be amplified.
- It is usual that the PCR primers do not contain any complementary structures with each other longer than 2 bases, especially at their 3′ ends, as this feature may promote the formation of an artifactual product called “primer dimer”. When the 3′ ends of the two primers hybridize, they form a “primed template” complex, and primer extension results in a short duplex product called “primer dimer”.
- Internal secondary structure should be avoided in primers. For symmetric PCR, a 40-60% G+C content is often recommended for both primers, with no long stretches of any one base. The classical melting temperature calculations used in conjunction with DNA probe hybridization studies often predict that a given primer should anneal at a specific temperature or that the 72° C. extension temperature will dissociate the primer/template hybrid prematurely. In practice, the hybrids are more effective in the PCR process than generally predicted by simple Tm calculations.
- Optimum annealing temperatures may be determined empirically and may be higher than predicted. Taq DNA polymerase does have activity in the 37-55° C. region, so primer extension will occur during the annealing step and the hybrid will be stabilized. The concentrations of the primers are equal in conventional (symmetric) PCR and, typically, within 0.1- to 1-μM range.
- The “tags” are ligated into a transposon or transposon-like element to form the nucleic acid comprising a unique marker sequence. Conveniently, the transposon is carried on a suicide vector which is maintained as a plasmid in a “helper” organism, but which is lost after transfer to the microorganism of the method of the invention. For example, the “helper” organism may be a strain of Escherichia coli, the microorganism of the method may be Salmonella and the transfer is a conjugal transfer. Although the transposon can be lost after transfer, in a proportion of cells it undergoes a transposition event through which it integrates at random, along with its unique tag, into the genome of the microorganism used in the method. It is most preferred if the transposon or transposon-like element can be selected. For example, in the case of Salmonella, a kanamycin resistance gene may be present in the transposon and exconjugants are selected on medium containing kanamycin. It is also possible to complement an auxotrophic marker in the recipient cell with a functional gene in the nucleic acid comprising the unique marker. This method is particularly convenient when fungi are used in the method.
- Preferably the complementing functional gene is not derived from the same species as the recipient microorganism, otherwise non-random integration events may occur.
- It is also particularly convenient if the transposon or transposon-like element is carried on a vector which is maintained episomally (ie not as part of the chromosome) in the microorganism used in the method of the first aspect of the invention when in a first given condition whereas, upon changing that condition to a second given condition, the episome cannot be maintained permitting the selection of a cell in which the transposon or transposon-like element has undergone a transposition event through which it integrates at random, along with its unique tag, into the genome of the microorganism used in the method. This particularly convenient embodiment is advantageous because, once a microorganism carrying the episomal vector is made, then each time the transposition event is selected for or induced by changing the condition of the microorganism (or a clone thereof) from a first given condition to a second given condition, the transposon can integrate at a different site in the genome of the microorganism. Thus, once a master collection of microorganisms are made, each member of which contains a unique tag sequence in the transposon or transposon-like element carried on the episomal vector (when in the first given condition), it can be used repeatedly to generate pools of random insertional mutants, each of which contains a different tag sequence (ie unique within the pool). This embodiment is particularly useful because (a) it reduces the number and complexity of manipulations required to generate the plurality (“pool”) of independently mutated microorganisms in step (1) of the method; and (b) the number of different tags need only be the same as the number of microorganisms in the plurality of microorganisms in step (1) of the method. Point (a) makes the method easier to use in organisms for which transposon mutagenesis is more difficult to perform (for example, Staphylococcus aureus) and point (b) means that tag sequences with particularly good hybridisation characteristics can be selected therefore making quality control easier. As is described in more detail below, the “pool” size is conveniently about 100 or 200 independently-mutated microorganisms and, therefore the master collection of microorganisms is conveniently stored in one or two 96-well microtitre plates.
- In a particularly preferred embodiment the first given condition is a first particular temperature or temperature range such as 25° C. to 32° C., most preferably about 30° C. and the second given condition is a second particular temperature or temperature range such as 35° C. to 45° C., most preferably 42° C. In further preferred embodiments the first given condition is the presence of an antibiotic, such as streptomycin, and the second given condition is the absence of the said antibiotic; or the first given condition is the absence of an antibiotic and the second given condition is the presence of the said antibiotic.
- Transposons suitable for integration into the genome of Gram negative bacteria include Tn5, Tn10 and derivatives thereof. Transposons suitable for integration into the genome of Gram positive bacteria include Tn916 and derivatives or analogues thereof. Transposons particularly suited for use with Staphylococcus aureus include Tn917 (Cheung et al (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89, 6462-6466) and Tn918 (Albus et al (1991) Infect. Immun. 59, 1008-1014).
- It is particularly preferred if the transposons have the properties of the Tn917 derivatives described by Camilli et al (1990) J. Bacteriol. 172, 3738-3744, and are carried by a temperature-sensitive vector such as pE194Ts (Villafane et al (1987) J. Bacteriol. 169, 4822-4829).
- It will be appreciated that although transposons are convenient for insertionally inactivating a gene, any other known method, or method developed in the future may be used. A further convenient method of insertionally inactivating a gene, particularly in certain bacteria such as Streptococcus, is using insertion-duplication mutagenesis such as that described in Morrison et al (1984) J. Bacteriol 159, 870 with respect to S. pneumoniae. The general method may also be applied to other microorganisms, especially bacteria.
- For fungi, insertional mutations are created by transformation using DNA fragments or plasmids carrying the “tags” and, preferably, selectable markers encoding, for example, resistance to hygromycin B or phleomycin (see Smith et al (1994) Infect. Immunol. 62, 5247-5254). Random, single integration of DNA fragments encoding hygromycin B resistance into the genome of filamentous fungi, using restriction enzyme mediated integration (REMI; Schiestl & Petes (1991); Lu et al (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91, 12649-12653) are known.
- A simple insertional mutagenesis technique for a fungus is described in Schiestl & Petes (1994) incorporated herein by reference, and include, for example, the use of Ty elements and ribosomal DNA in yeast.
- Random integration of the transposon or other DNA sequence allows isolation of a plurality of independently mutated microorganisms wherein a different gene is insertionally inactivated in each mutant and each mutant contains a different marker sequence.
- A library of such insertion mutants is arrayed in welled microtitre dishes so that each well contains a different mutant microorganism. DNA comprising the unique marker sequence from each individual mutant microorganism (conveniently, the total DNA from the clone is used) is stored. Conveniently, this is done by removing a sample of the microorganism from the microtitre dish, spotting it onto a nucleic acid hybridisation membrane (such as nitrocellulose or nylon membranes), lysing the microorganism in alkali and fixing the nucleic acid to the membrane. Thus, a replica of the contents of the welled microtitre dishes is made.
- Pools of the microorganisms from the welled microtitre dish are made and DNA is extracted. This DNA is used as a target for a PCR using primers that anneal to the common “arms” flanking the “tags” and the amplified DNA is labelled, for example with 32P. The product of the PCR is used to probe the DNA stored from each individual mutant to provide a reference hybridisation pattern for the replicas of the welled microtitre dishes. This is a check that each of the individual microorganisms does, in fact, contain a marker sequence and that the marker sequence can be amplified and labelled efficiently.
- Pools of transposon mutants are made to introduce into the particular environment. Conveniently, 96-well microtitre dishes are used and the pool contains 96 transposon mutants. However, the lower limit for the pool is two mutants; there is no theoretical upper limit to the size of the pool but, as discussed below, the upper limit may be determined in relation to the environment into which the mutants are introduced.
- Once the microorganisms are introduced into the said particular environment those microorganisms which are able to do so are allowed to grow in the environment. The length of time the microorganisms are left in the environment is determined by the nature of the microorganism and the environment. After a suitable length of time, the microorganisms are recovered from the environment, DNA is extracted and the DNA is used as a template for a PCR using primers that anneal to the “arms” flanking the “tags”. The PCR product is labelled, for example with 32P, and is used to probe the DNA stored from each individual mutant replicated from the welled microtitre dish. Stored DNA are identified which hybridise weakly or not at all with the probe generated from the DNA isolated from the microorganisms recovered from environment. These non-hybridising DNAs correspond to mutants whose adaptation to the particular environment has been attenuated by insertion of the transposon or other DNA sequence.
- In a particularly preferred embodiment the “arms” have no, or very little, label compared to the “tags”. For example, the PCR primers are suitably designed to contain no, or a single, G residue, the 32P-labelled nucleotide is dCTP and, in this case, no or one radiolabelled C residue is incorporated in each “arm” but a greater number of radiolabelled C residues are incorporated in the “tag”. It is preferred if the “tag” has at least ten-fold more label incorporated than the “arms”; preferably twenty-fold or more; more preferably fifty-fold or more. Conveniently the “arms” can be removed from the “tag” using a suitable restriction enzyme, a site for which may be incorporated in the primer design.
- As discussed above, a particularly preferred embodiment of the invention is when the microorganism is a pathogenic microorganism and the particular environment is an animal. In this embodiment, the size of the pool of mutants introduced into the animal is determined by (a) the number of cells of each mutant that are likely to survive in the animal (assuming a virulence gene has not been inactivated) and (b) the total inoculum of the microorganism. If the number in (a) is too low then false positive results may arise and if the number in (b) is too high then the animal may die before enough mutants have had a chance to grow in the desired way. The number of cells in (a) can be determined for each microorganism used but it is preferably more than 50, more preferably more than 100.
- The number of different mutants that can be introduced into a single animal is preferably between 50 and 500, conveniently about 100. It is preferred if the total inoculum does not exceed 106 cells (and it is preferably 105 cells) although the size of the inoculum may be varied above or below this amount depending on the microorganism and the animal.
- In a particularly convenient method an inoculum of 105 is used containing 1000 cells each of 100 different mutants for a single animal. It will be appreciated that in this method one animal can be used to screen 100 mutants compared to prior art methods which require at least 100 animals to screen 100 mutants.
- However, it is convenient to inoculate three animals with the same pool of mutants so that at least two can be investigated (one as a replica to check the reliability of the method), whilst the third is kept as a back-up. Nevertheless, the method still provides a greater than 30-fold saving in the number of animals used.
- The time between the pool of mutants being introduced into the animal and the microorganisms being recovered may vary with the microorganism and animal used. For example, when the animal is a mouse and the microorganism is Salmonella typhimurium, the time between inoculation and recovery is about three days.
- In one embodiment of the invention microorganisms are retrieved from the environment in step (5) at a site remote from the site of introduction in step (4), so that the virulence genes being investigated include those involved in the spread of the microorganism between the two sites.
- For example, in a plant the microorganism may be introduced in a lesion in the stem or at one site on a leaf and the microorganism retrieved from another site on the leaf where a disease state is indicated.
- In the case of an animal, the microorganism may be introduced orally, intraperitoneally, intravenously or intranasally and is retrieved at a later time from an internal organ such as the spleen. It may be useful to compare the virulence genes identified by oral administration and those identified by intraperitoneal administration as some genes may be required to establish infection by one route but not by the other. It is preferred if Salmonella is introduced intraperitoneally.
- Other preferred environments which may be used to identify virulence genes are animal cells in culture (particularly macrophages and epithelial cells) and plant cells in culture. Although using cells in culture will be useful in its own right, it will also complement the use of the whole animal or plant, as the case may be, as the environment.
- It is also preferred if the environment is a part of the animal body. Within a given host-parasite interaction, a number of different environments are possible, including different organs and tissues, and parts thereof such as the Peyer's patch.
- The number of individual microorganisms (ie cells) recovered from the environment should be at least twice, preferably at least ten times, more preferably 100-times the number of different mutants introduced into the environment. For example, when an animal is inoculated with 100 different mutants around 10,000 individual microorganisms should be retrieved and their marker DNA isolated.
- A further preferred embodiment comprises the steps:
- (1A) removing auxotrophs from the plurality of mutants produced in step (1); or
- (6A) determining whether the mutant selected in step (6) is an auxotroph; or
- both (1A) and (6A).
- It is desirable to distinguish an auxotroph (that is a mutant microorganism which requires growth factors not needed by the wild type or by prototrophs) and a mutant microorganism wherein a gene allowing the microorganism to adapt to a particular environment is inactivated. Conveniently, this is done between steps (1) and (2) or after step (6).
- Preferably auxotrophs are not removed when virulence genes are being identified.
- A second aspect of the invention provides a method of identifying a gene which allows a microorganism to adapt to a particular environment, the method comprising the method of the first aspect of the invention, followed by the additional step:
- (7) isolating the insertionally-inactivated gene or part thereof from the individual mutant selected in step (6).
- Methods for isolating a gene containing a unique marker are well known in the art of molecular biology.
- A further preferred embodiment comprises the further additional step:
- (8) isolating from a wild-type microorganism the corresponding wild-type gene using the insertionally-inactivated gene isolated in step (7) or part thereof as a probe.
- Methods for gene probing are well known in the art of molecular biology.
- Molecular biological methods suitable for use in the practice of the present invention are disclosed in Sambrook et al (1989) incorporated herein by reference.
- When the microorganism is a microorganism pathogenic to an animal and the gene is a virulence gene and a transposon has been used to insertionally inactivate the gene, it is convenient for the virulence genes to be cloned by digesting genomic DNA from the individual mutant selected in step (6) with a restriction enzyme which cuts outside the transposon, ligating size-fractionated DNA containing the transposon into a plasmid, and selecting plasmid recombinants on the basis of antibiotic resistance conferred by the transposon and not by the plasmid. The microorganism genomic DNA adjacent to the transposon is sequenced using two primers which anneal to the terminal regions of the transposon, and two primers which anneal close to the polylinker sequences of the plasmid. The sequences may be subjected to DNA database searches to determine if the transposon has interrupted a known virulence gene. Thus, conveniently, sequence obtained by this method is compared against the sequences present in the publicly available databases such as EMBL and GenBank. Finally, if the interrupted sequence appears to be in a new virulence gene, the mutation is transferred to a new genetic background (for example by phage P22-mediated transduction in the case of Salmonella) and the LD50 of the mutant strain is determined to confirm that the avirulent phenotype is due to the transposition event and not a secondary mutation.
- The number of individual mutants screened in order to detect all of the virulence genes in a microorganism depends on the number of genes in the genome of the microorganism. For example, it is likely that 3000-5000 mutants of Salmonella typhimurium need to be screened in order to detect the majority of virulence genes whereas for Aspergillus spp., which has a larger genome than Salmonella, around 20 000 mutants are screened. Approximately 4% of non-essential S. typhimurium genes are thought to be required for virulence (Grossman & Saier, 1990) and, if so, the S. typhimurium genome contains approximately 150 virulence genes. However, the methods of the invention provide a faster, more convenient and much more practicable route to identifying virulence genes.
- A third aspect of the invention provides a microorganism obtained using the method of the first aspect of the invention.
- Such microorganisms are useful because they have the property of not being adapted to survive in a particular environment.
- In a preferred embodiment, a pathogenic microorganism is not adapted to survive in a host organism (environment) and, in the case of microorganisms that are pathogenic to animals, particularly mammals, more particularly humans, the mutant obtained by the method of the invention may be used in a vaccine. The mutant is avirulent, and therefore expected to be suitable for administration to a patient, but it is expected to be antigenic and give rise to a protective immune response.
- In a further preferred embodiment the pathogenic microorganism not adapted to survive in a host organism, obtained by the methods of the invention, is modified, preferably by the introduction of a suitable DNA sequence, to express an antigenic epitope from another pathogen. This modified microorganism can act as a vaccine for that other pathogen.
- A fourth aspect of the invention provides a microorganism comprising a mutation in a gene identified using the method of the second aspect of the invention.
- Thus, although the microorganism of the third aspect of the invention is useful, it is preferred if a mutation is specifically introduced into the identified gene. In a preferred embodiment, particularly when the microorganism is to be used in a vaccine, the mutation in the gene is a deletion or a frameshift mutation or any other mutation which is substantially incapable of reverting. Such gene-specific mutations can be made using standard procedures such as introducing into the microorganism a copy of the mutant gene on an autonomous replicon (such as a plasmid or viral genome) and relying on homologous recombination to introduce the mutation into the copy of the gene in the genome of the microorganism.
- Fifth and sixth aspects of the invention provide a suitable microorganism for use in a vaccine and a vaccine comprising a suitable microorganism and a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier.
- The suitable microorganism is the aforementioned avirulent mutant.
- Active immunisation of the patient is preferred. In this approach, one or more mutant microorganisms are prepared in an immunogenic formulation containing suitable adjuvants and carriers and administered to the patient in known ways. Suitable adjuvants include Freund's complete or incomplete adjuvant, muramyl dipeptide, the “Iscoms” of EP 109 942,
EP 180 564 andEP 231 039, aluminium hydroxide, saponin, DEAE-dextran, neutral oils (such as miglyol), vegetable oils (such as arachis oil), liposomes, Pluronic polyols or the Ribi adjuvant system (see, for example GB-A-2 189 141). “Pluronic” is a Registered Trade Mark. The patient to be immunised is a patient requiring to be protected from the disease caused by the virulent form of the microorganism. - The aforementioned avirulent microorganisms of the invention or a formulation thereof may be administered by any conventional method including oral and parenteral (eg subcutaneous or intramuscular) injection. The treatment may consist of a single dose or a plurality of doses over a period of time.
- Whilst it is possible for an avirulent microorganism of the invention to be administered alone, it is preferable to present it as a pharmaceutical formulation, together with one or more acceptable carriers. The carrier(s) must be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the avirulent microorganism of the invention and not deleterious to the recipients thereof. Typically, the carriers will be water or saline which will be sterile and pyrogen free.
- It will be appreciated that the vaccine of the invention, depending on its microorganism component, may be useful in the fields of human medicine and veterinary medicine.
- Diseases caused by microorganisms are known in many animals, such as domestic animals. The vaccines of the invention, when containing an appropriate avirulent microorganism, particularly avirulent bacterium, are useful in man but also in, for example, cows, sheep, pigs, horses, dogs and cats, and in poultry such as chickens, turkeys, ducks and geese.
- Seventh and eighth aspects of the invention provide a gene obtained by the method of the second aspect of the invention, and a polypeptide encoded thereby.
- By “gene” we include not only the regions of DNA that code for a polypeptide but also regulatory regions of DNA such as regions of DNA that regulate transcription, translation and, for some microorganisms, splicing of RNA. Thus, the gene includes promoters, transcription terminators, ribosome-binding sequences and for some organisms introns and splice recognition sites.
- Typically, sequence information of the inactivated gene obtained in
step 7 is derived. Conveniently, sequences close to the ends of the transposon are used as the hybridisation site of a sequencing primer. The derived sequence or a DNA restriction fragment adjacent to the inactivated gene itself is used to make a hybridisation probe with which to identify, and isolate from a wild-type organism, the corresponding wild type gene. It is preferred if the hybridisation probing is done under stringent conditions to ensure that the gene, and not a relative, is obtained. By “stringent” we mean that the gene hybridises to the probe when the gene is immobilised on a membrane and the probe (which, in this case is >200 nucleotides in length) is in solution and the immobilised gene/hybridised probe is washed in 0.1.times.SSC at 65° C. for 10 min. SSC is 0.15 M NaCl/0.015 M Na citrate. - Preferred probe sequences for cloning Salmonella virulence genes are shown in
FIGS. 5 and 6 (SEQ ID NOS:39-44 and 8-36) and described in Example 2. - In a particularly preferred embodiment the Salmonella virulence genes comprise the sequence shown in
FIGS. 5 and 6 and described in Example 2. - In further preference the genes are those contained within, or at least part of which is contained within, the sequences shown in
FIGS. 11 and 12 (SEQ ID NOS:37 and 38) and which have been identified by the method of the second aspect of the invention. The sequences shown inFIGS. 11 and 12 are part of a gene cluster from Salmonella typhimurium which I have called virulence gene cluster 2 (VGC2). The position of transposon insertions are indicated within the sequence, and these transposon insertions inactivate a virulence determinant of the organism. As is discussed more fully below, and in particular in Example 4, when the method of the second aspect of the invention is used to identify virulence genes in Salmonella typhimunum, many of the nucleic acid insertions (and therefore genes identified) are clustered in a relatively small part of the genome. This region, VGC2, contains other virulence genes which, as described below, form part of the invention. - The gene isolated by the method of the invention can be expressed in a suitable host cell. Thus, the gene (DNA) may be used in accordance with known techniques, appropriately modified in view of the teachings contained herein, to construct an expression vector, which is then used to transform an appropriate host cell for the expression and production of the polypeptide of the invention. Such techniques include those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,440,859 issued Apr. 3, 1984 to Rutter et al, U.S. Pat. No. 4,530,901 issued Jul. 23, 1985 to Weissman, U.S. Pat. No. 4,582,800 issued Apr. 15, 1986 to Crowl, U.S. Pat. No. 4,677,063 issued Jun. 30, 1987 to Mark et al, U.S. Pat. No. 4,678,751 issued Jul. 7, 1987 to Goeddel, U.S. Pat. No. 4,704,362 issued Nov. 3, 1987 to Itakura et al, U.S. Pat. No. 4,710,463 issued Dec. 1, 1987 to Murray, U.S. Pat. No. 4,757,006 issued Jul. 12, 1988 to Toole, Jr. et al, U.S. Pat. No. 4,766,075 issued Aug. 23, 1988 to Goeddel et al and U.S. Pat. No. 4,810,648 issued Mar. 7, 1989 to Stalker, all of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- The DNA encoding the polypeptide constituting the compound of the invention may be joined to a wide variety of other DNA sequences for introduction into an appropriate host. The companion DNA will depend upon the nature of the host, the manner of the introduction of the DNA into the host, and whether episomal maintenance or integration is desired.
- Generally, the DNA is inserted into an expression vector, such as a plasmid, in proper orientation and correct reading frame for expression. If necessary, the DNA may be linked to the appropriate transcriptional and translational regulatory control nucleotide sequences recognised by the desired host, although such controls are generally available in the expression vector. The vector is then introduced into the host through standard techniques. Generally, not all of the hosts will be transformed by the vector. Therefore, it will be necessary to select for transformed host cells. One selection technique involves incorporating into the expression vector a DNA sequence, with any necessary control elements, that codes for a selectable trait in the transformed cell, such as antibiotic resistance. Alternatively, the gene for such selectable trait can be on another vector, which is used to co-transform the desired host cell.
- Host cells that have been transformed by the recombinant DNA of the invention are then cultured for a sufficient time and under appropriate conditions known to those skilled in the art in view of the teachings disclosed herein to permit the expression of the polypeptide, which can then be recovered.
- Many expression systems are known, including bacteria (for example E. coli and Bacillus subtilis), yeasts (for example Saccharomyces cerevisiae), filamentous fungi (for example Aspergillus), plant cells, animal cells and insect cells.
- The vectors include a prokaryotic replicon, such as the Co1E1 ori, for propagation in a prokaryote, even if the vector is to be used for expression in other, non-prokaryotic, cell types. The vectors can also include an appropriate promoter such as a prokaryotic promoter capable of directing the expression (transcription and translation) of the genes in a bacterial host cell, such as E. coli, transformed therewith.
- A promoter is an expression control element formed by a DNA sequence that permits binding of RNA polymerase and transcription to occur. Promoter sequences compatible with exemplary bacterial hosts are typically provided in plasmid vectors containing convenient restriction sites for insertion of a DNA segment of the present invention.
- Typical prokaryotic vector plasmids are pUC18, pUC19, pBR322 and pBR329 available from Biorad Laboratories, (Richmond, Calif., USA) and pTrc99A and pKK223-3 available from Pharmacia, Piscataway, N.J., USA.
- A typical mammalian cell vector plasmid is pSVL available from Pharmacia, Piscataway, N.J., USA. This vector uses the SV40 late promoter to drive expression of cloned genes, the highest level of expression being found in T antigen-producing cells, such as COS-1 cells.
- An example of an inducible mammalian expression vector is pMSG, also available from Pharmacia. This vector uses the glucocorticoid-inducible promoter of the mouse mammary tumour virus long terminal repeat to drive expression of the cloned gene.
- Useful yeast plasmid vectors are pRS403-406 and pRS413-416 and are generally available from Stratagene Cloning Systems, La Jolla, Calif. 92037, USA. Plasmids pRS403, pRS404, pRS405 and pRS406 are Yeast Integrating plasmids (YIps) and incorporate the yeast selectable markers HIS3, TRP1, LEU2 and URA3. Plasmids pRS413-416 are Yeast Centromere plasmids (YCps).
- A variety of methods have been developed to operably link DNA to vectors via complementary cohesive termini. For instance, complementary homopolymer tracts can be added to the DNA segment to be inserted to the vector DNA. The vector and DNA segment are then joined by hydrogen bonding between the complementary homopolymeric tails to form recombinant DNA molecules.
- Synthetic linkers containing one or more restriction sites provide an alternative method of joining the DNA segment to vectors. The DNA segment, generated by endonuclease restriction digestion as described earlier, is treated with bacteriophage T4 DNA polymerase or E. coli DNA polymerase I, enzymes that remove protruding, 3′-single-stranded termini with their 3′-5′-exonucleolytic activities, and fill in recessed 3′-ends with their polymerizing activities.
- The combination of these activities therefore generates blunt-ended DNA segments. The blunt-ended segments are then incubated with a large molar excess of linker molecules in the presence of an enzyme that is able to catalyze the ligation of blunt-ended DNA molecules, such as bacteriophage T4 DNA ligase. Thus, the products of the reaction are DNA segments carrying polymeric linker sequences at their ends. These DNA segments are then cleaved with the appropriate restriction enzyme and ligated to an expression vector that has been cleaved with an enzyme that produces termini compatible with those of the DNA segment.
- Synthetic linkers containing a variety of restriction endonuclease sites are commercially available from a number of sources including International Biotechnologies Inc, New Haven, Conn., USA.
- A desirable way to modify the DNA encoding the polypeptide of the invention is to use the polymerase chain reaction as disclosed by Saiki et al (1988)
Science 239, 487-491. - In this method the DNA to be enzymatically amplified is flanked by two specific oligonucleotide primers which themselves become incorporated into the amplified DNA. The said specific primers may contain restriction endonuclease recognition sites which can be used for cloning into expression vectors using methods known in the art.
- Variants of the genes also form part of the invention. It is preferred if the variant has at least 70% sequence identity, more preferably at least 85% sequence identity, most preferably at least 95% sequence identity with the genes isolated by the method of the invention. Of course, replacements, deletions and insertions may be tolerated. The degree of similarity between one nucleic acid sequence and another can be determined using the GAP program of the University of Wisconsin Computer Group.
- Similarly, variants of proteins encoded by the genes are included.
- By “variants” we include insertions, deletions and substitutions, either conservative or non-conservative, where such changes do not substantially alter the normal function of the protein.
- By “conservative substitution” is intended combinations such as Gly, Ala; Val, Ile, Leu; Asp, Glu; Asn, Gln; Ser, Thr; Lys, Arg; and Phe, Tyr.
- Such variants may be made using the well known methods of protein engineering and site-directed mutagenesis.
- A ninth aspect of the invention provides a method of identifying a compound which reduces the ability of a microorganism to adapt to a particular environment comprising the steps of selecting a compound which interferes with the function of (1) a gene obtained by the method of the second aspect of the invention or of (2) a polypeptide encoded by such a gene.
- Pairwise screens for compounds which affect the wild type cell but not a cell overproducing a gene isolated by the methods of the invention form part of this aspect of the invention.
- For example, in one embodiment one cell is a wild type cell and a second cell is the Salmonella which is made to overexpress the gene isolated by the method of the invention. The viability and/or growth of each cell in the particular environment is determined in the presence of a compound to be tested to identify which compound reduces the viability or growth of the wild type cell but not the cell overexpressing the said gene.
- It is preferred if the gene is a virulence gene.
- For example, in one embodiment the microorganism (such as S. typhimurium) is made to over-express the virulence gene identified by the method of the first aspect of the invention. Each of (a) the “over-expressing” microorganism and (b) an equivalent microorganism (which does not over-express the virulence gene) are used to infect cells in culture. Whether a particular test compound will selectively inhibit the virulence gene function is determined by assessing the amount of the test compound which is required to prevent infection of the host cells by (a) the over-expressing microorganism and (b) the equivalent microorganism (at least for some virulence gene products it is envisaged that the test compound will inactivate them, and itself be inactivated, by binding to the virulence gene product). If more of the compound is required to prevent infection by the (a) than (b) then this suggests that the compound is selective. It is preferred if the microorganisms (such as Salmonella) are destroyed extracellularly by a mild antibiotic such as gentamicin (which does not penetrate host cells) and that the effect of the test compound in preventing infection of the cell by the microorganism is by lysing the said cell and determining how many microorganisms are present (for example by plating on agar).
- Pairwise screens and other screens for compounds are generally disclosed in Kirsch & Di Domenico (1993) in “The Discovery of Natural Products with a Therapeutic Potential” (Ed, V. P. Gallo),
Chapter 6, pages 177-221, Butterworths, V. K. (incorporated herein by reference). - Pairwise screens can be designed in a number of related formats in which the relative sensitivity to a compound is compared using two genetically related strains. If the strains differ at a single locus, then a compound specific for that target can be identified by comparing each strain's sensitivity to the inhibitor. For example, inhibitors specific to the target will be more active against a super-sensitive test strain when compared to an otherwise isogenic sister strain. In an agar diffusion format, this is determined by measuring the size of the zone of inhibition surrounding the disc or well carrying the compound. Because of diffusion, a continuous concentration gradient of compound is set up, and the strain's sensitivity to inhibitors is proportional to the distance from the disc or well to the edge of the zone. General antimicrobials, or antimicrobials with modes of action other than the desired one are generally observed as having similar activities against the two strains.
- Another type of molecular genetic screen, involving pairs of strains where a cloned gene product is overexpressed in one strain compared to a control strain. The rationale behind this type of assay is that the strain containing an elevated quantity of the target protein should be more resistant to inhibitors specific to the cloned gene product than an isogenic strain, containing normal amounts of the target protein. In an agar diffusion assay, the zone size surrounding a specific compound is expected to be smaller in the strain overexpressing the target protein compared to an otherwise isogenic strain.
- Additionally or alternatively selection of a compound is achieved in the following steps:
- 1. A mutant microorganism obtained using the method of the first aspect of the invention is used as a control (it has a given phenotype, for example, avirulence).
- 2. A compound to be tested is mixed with the wild-type microorganism.
- 3. The wild-type microorganism is introduced into the environment (with or without the test compound).
- 4. If the wild-type microorganism is unable to adapt to the environment (following treatment by, or in the presence of, the compound), the compound is one which reduces the ability of the microorganism to adapt to, or survive in, the particular environment.
- When the environment is an animal body and the microorganism is a pathogenic microorganism, the compound identified by this method can be used in a medicament to prevent or ameliorate infection with the microorganism.
- A tenth aspect of the invention therefore provides a compound identifiable by the method of the ninth aspect.
- It will be appreciated that uses of the compound of the tenth aspect are related to the method by which it can be identified, and in particular in relation to the host of a pathogenic microorganism. For example, if the compound is identifiable by a method which uses a virulence gene, or polypeptide encoded thereby, from a bacterium which infects a mammal, the compound may be useful in treating infection of a mammal by that bacterium.
- Similarly, if the compound is identifiable by a method which uses a virulence gene, or polypeptide encoded thereby, from a fungus which infects a plant, the compound may be useful in treating infection of a plant by that fungus.
- An eleventh aspect of the invention provides a molecule which selectively interacts with, and substantially inhibits the function of, a gene of the seventh aspect of the invention or a nucleic acid product thereof.
- By “nucleic acid product thereof” we include any RNA, especially mRNA, transcribed from the gene.
- Preferably a molecule which selectively interacts with, and substantially inhibits the function of, said gene or said nucleic acid product is an antisense nucleic acid or nucleic acid derivative.
- More preferably, said molecule is an antisense oligonucleotide.
- Antisense oligonucleotides are single-stranded nucleic acid, which can specifically bind to a complementary nucleic acid sequence. By binding to the appropriate target sequence, an RNA-RNA, a DNA-DNA, or RNA-DNA duplex is formed. These nucleic acids are often termed “antisense” because they are complementary to the sense or coding strand of the gene. Recently, formation of a triple helix has proven possible where the oligonucleotide is bound to a DNA duplex. It was found that oligonucleotides could recognise sequences in the major groove of the DNA double helix. A triple helix was formed thereby. This suggests that it is possible to synthesise sequence-specific molecules which specifically bind double-stranded DNA via recognition of major groove hydrogen binding sites.
- Clearly, the sequence of the antisense nucleic acid or oligonucleotide can readily be determined by reference to the nucleotide sequence of the gene in question. For example, antisense nucleic acid or oligonucleotides can be designed which are complementary to a part of the sequence shown in
FIG. 11 or 12, especially to sequences which form a part of a virulence gene. - Oligonucleotides are subject to being degraded or inactivated by cellular endogenous nucleases. To counter this problem, it is possible to use modified oligonucleotides, eg having altered internucleotide linkages, in which the naturally occurring phosphodiester linkages have been replaced with another linkage. For example, Agrawal et al (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85, 7079-7083 showed increased inhibition in tissue culture of HIV-1 using oligonucleotide phosphoramidates and phosphorothioates. Sarin et al (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85, 7448-7451 demonstrated increased inhibition of HIV-1 using oligonucleotide methylphosphonates. Agrawal et al (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86, 7790-7794 showed inhibition of HIV-1 replication in both early-infected and chronically infected cell cultures, using nucleotide sequence-specific oligonucleotide phosphorothioates. Leither et al (1990) Proc. NatL. Acad. Sci. USA 87, 3430-3434 report inhibition in tissue culture of influenza virus replication by oligonucleotide phosphorothioates.
- Oligonucleotides having artificial linkages have been shown to be resistant to degradation in vivo. For example, Shaw et al (1991) in Nucleic Acids Res. 19, 747-750, report that otherwise unmodified oligonucleotides become more resistant to nucleases in vivo when they are blocked at the 3′ end by certain capping structures and that uncapped oligonucleotide phosphorothioates are not degraded in vivo.
- A detailed description of the H-phosphonate approach to synthesizing oligonucleoside phosphorothioates is provided in Agrawal and Tang (1990)
Tetrahedron Letters 31, 7541-7544, the teachings of which are hereby incorporated herein by reference. Syntheses of oligonucleoside methylphosphonates, phosphorodithioates, phosphoramidates, phosphate esters, bridged phosphoramidates and bridge phosphorothioates are known in the art. See, for example, Agrawal and Goodchild (1987)Tetrahedron Letters 28, 3539; Nielsen et al (1988) Tetrahedron Letters 29, 2911; Jager et al (1988) Biochemistry 27, 7237; Uznanski et al (1987)Tetrahedron Letters 28, 3401; Bannwarth (1988) Helv. Chim. Acta. 71, 1517; Crosstick and Vyle (1989) Tetrahedron Letters 30, 4693; Agrawal et al (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87, 1401-1405, the teachings of which are incorporated herein by reference. Other methods for synthesis or production also are possible. In a preferred embodiment the oligonucleotide is a deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA), although ribonucleic acid (RNA) sequences may also be synthesized and applied. - The oligonucleotides useful in the invention preferably are designed to resist degradation by endogenous nucleolytic enzymes. In vivo degradation of oligonucleotides produces oligonucleotide breakdown products of reduced length. Such breakdown products are more likely to engage in non-specific hybridization and are less likely to be effective, relative to their full-length counterparts. Thus, it is desirable to use oligonucleotides that are resistant to degradation in the body and which are able to reach the targeted cells. The present oligonucleotides can be rendered more resistant to degradation in vivo by substituting one or more internal artificial internucleotide linkages for the native phosphodiester linkages, for example, by replacing phosphate with sulphur in the linkage. Examples of linkages that may be used include phosphorothioates, methylphosphonates, sulphone, sulphate, ketyl, phosphorodithioates, various phosphoramidates, phosphate esters, bridged phosphorothioates and bridged phosphoramidates. Such examples are illustrative, rather than limiting, since other internucleotide linkages are known in the art. See, for example, Cohen, (1990) Trends in Biotechnology. The synthesis of oligonucleotides having one or more of these linkages substituted for the phosphodiester internucleotide linkages is well known in the art, including synthetic pathways for producing oligonucleotides having mixed internucleotide linkages.
- Oligonucleotides can be made resistant to extension by endogenous enzymes by “capping” or incorporating similar groups on the 5′ or 3′ terminal nucleotides. A reagent for capping is commercially available as Amino-Link II.™ from Applied BioSystems Inc, Foster City, Calif. Methods for capping are described, for example, by Shaw et al (1991) Nucleic Acids Res. 19, 747-750 and Agrawal et al (1991) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88(17), 7595-7599, the teachings of which are hereby incorporated herein by reference.
- A further method of making oligonucleotides resistant to nuclease attack is for them to be “self-stabilized” as described by Tang et al (1993) Nucl. Acids Res. 21, 2729-2735 in corporated herein by reference. Self-stabilized oligonucleotides have hairpin loop structures at their 3′ ends, and show increased resistance to degradation by snake venom phosphodiesterase, DNA polymerase I and fetal bovine serum. The self-stabilized region of the oligonucleotide does not interfere in hybridization with complementary nucleic acids, and pharmacokinetic and stability studies in mice have shown increased in vivo persistence of self-stabilized oligonucleotides with respect to their linear counterparts.
- In accordance with the invention, the inherent binding specificity of antisense oligonucleotides characteristic of base pairing is enhanced by limiting the availability of the antisense compound to its intend locus in vivo, permitting lower dosages to be used and minimizing systemic effects. Thus, oligonucleotides are applied locally to achieve the desired effect. The concentration of the oligonucleotides at the desired locus is much higher than if the oligonucleotides were administered systemically, and the therapeutic effect can be achieved using a significantly lower total amount. The local high concentration of oligonucleotides enhances penetration of the targeted cells and effectively blocks translation of the target nucleic acid sequences.
- The oligonucleotides can be delivered to the locus by any means appropriate for localized administration of a drug. For example, a solution of the oligonucleotides can be injected directly to the site or can be delivered by infusion using an infusion pump. The oligonucleotides also can be incorporated into an implantable device which when placed at the desired site, permits the oligonucleotides to be released into the surrounding locus.
- The oligonucleotides are most preferably administered via a hydrogel material. The hydrogel is noninflammatory and biodegradable. Many such materials now are known, including those made from natural and synthetic polymers. In a preferred embodiment, the method exploits a hydrogel which is liquid below body temperature but gels to form a shape-retaining semisolid hydrogel at or near body temperature. Preferred hydrogel are polymers of ethylene oxide-propylene oxide repeating units. The properties of the polymer are dependent on the molecular weight of the polymer and the relative percentage of polyethylene oxide and polypropylene oxide in the polymer. Preferred hydrogels contain from about 10 to about 80% by weight ethylene oxide and from about 20 to about 90% by weight propylene oxide. A particularly preferred hydrogel contains about 70% polyethylene oxide and 30% polypropylene oxide. Hydrogels which can be used are available, for example, from BASF Corp., Parsippany, N.J., under the tradename Pluronic.®.
- In this embodiment, the hydrogel is cooled to a liquid state and the oligonucleotides are admixed into the liquid to a concentration of about 1 mg oligonucleotide per gram of hydrogel. The resulting mixture then is applied onto the surface to be treated, for example by spraying or painting during surgery or using a catheter or endoscopic procedures. As the polymer warms, it solidifies to form a gel, and the oligonucleotides diffuse out of the gel into the surrounding cells over a period of time defined by the exact composition of the gel.
- The oligonucleotides can be administered by means of other implants that are commercially available or described in the scientific literature, including liposomes, microcapsules and implantable devices. For example, implants made of biodegradable materials such as polyanhydrides, polyorthoesters, polylactic acid and polyglycolic acid and copolymers thereof, collagen, and protein polymers, or non-biodegradable materials such as ethylenevinyl acetate (EVAc), polyvinyl acetate, ethylene vinyl alcohol, and derivatives thereof can be used to locally deliver the oligonucleotides. The oligonucleotides can be incorporated into the material as it is polymerized or solidified, using melt or solvent evaporation techniques, or mechanically mixed with the material. In one embodiment, the oligonucleotides are mixed into or applied onto coatings for implantable devices such as dextran coated silica beads, stents, or catheters.
- The dose of oligonucleotides is dependent on the size of the oligonucleotides and the purpose for which is it administered. In general, the range is calculated based on the surface area of tissue to be treated. The effective dose of oligonucleotide is somewhat dependent on the length and chemical composition of the oligonucleotide but is generally in the range of about 30 to 3000 μg per square centimeter of tissue surface area.
- The oligonucleotides may be administered to the patient systemically for both therapeutic and prophylactic purposes. The oligonucleotides may be administered by any effective method, for example, parenterally (eg intravenously, subcutaneously, intramuscularly) or by oral, nasal or other means which permit the oligonucleotides to access and circulate in the patient's bloodstream. Oligonucleotides administered systemically preferably are given in addition to locally administered oligonucleotides, but also have utility in the absence of local administration. A dosage in the range of from about 0.1 to about 10 grams per administration to an adult human generally will be effective for this purpose.
- It will be appreciated that the molecules of this aspect of the invention are useful in treating or preventing any infection caused by the microorganism from which the said gene has been isolated, or a close relative of said microorganism. Thus, the said molecule is an antibiotic.
- Thus, a twelfth aspect of the invention provides a molecule of the eleventh aspect of the invention for use in medicine.
- A thirteenth aspect of the invention provides a method of treating a host which has, or is susceptible to, an infection with a microorganism, the method comprising administering an effective amount of a molecule according to the eleventh aspect of the invention wherein said gene is present in said microorganisms, or a close relative of said microorganism.
- By “effective amount” we mean an amount which substantially prevents or ameliorates the infection. By “host” we include any animal or plant which may be infected by a microorganism.
- It will be appreciated that pharmaceutical formulations of the molecule of the eleventh aspect of the invention form part of the invention. Such pharmaceutical formulations comprise the said molecule together with one or more acceptable carriers. The carrier(s) must be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the said molecule of the invention and not deleterious to the recipients thereof. Typically, the carriers will be water or saline which will be sterile and pyrogen free.
- As mentioned above, and as described in more detail in Example 4 below, I have found that certain virulence genes are clustered in Salmonella typhimurium in a region of the chromosome that I have called VGC2. DNA-DNA hybridisation experiments have determined that sequences homologous to at least part of VGC2 are found in many species and strains of Salmonella but are not present in the E. coli and Shigella strains ested (see Example 4). These sequences almost certainly correspond to conserved genes, at least in Salmonella, and at least some of which are virulence genes. It is believed that equivalent genes in other Salmonella species and, if present, equivalent genes in other enteric or other bacteria will also be virulence genes.
- Whether a gene within the VGC2 region is a virulence gene is readily determined. For example, those genes within VGC2 which have been identified by the method of the second aspect of the invention (when applied to Salmonella typhimurium and wherein the environment is an animal such as a mouse) are virulence genes. Virulence genes are also identified by making a mutation in the gene (preferably a non-polar mutation) and determining whether the mutant strain is avirulent. Methods of making mutations in a selected gene are well known and are described below.
- A fourteenth aspect of the invention provides the VGC2 DNA of Salmonella typhimurium or a part thereof, or a variant of said DNA or a variant of a part thereof.
- The VGC2 DNA of Salmonella typhimurium is depicted diagrammatically in
FIG. 8 and is readily obtainable from Salmonella typhimurium ATCC 14028 (available from the American Type Culture Collection, 10801 University Boulevard, Manassas, Va. 20110-2209 USA; also deposited at the NCTC, Public Health Laboratory Service, Colindale, UK under accession no. NCTC 12021) using the information provided in Example 4. For example, probes derived from the sequences shown inFIGS. 11 and 12 may be used to identify lambda clones from a Salmonella typhimurium genomic library. Standard genome walking methods can be employed to obtain all of the VGC2 DNA. The restriction map shown inFIG. 8 can be used to identify and locate DNA fragments from VGC2. - By “part of the VGC2 DNA of Salmonella typhimurium” we mean any DNA sequence which comprises at least 10 nucleotides, preferably at least 20 nucleotides, more preferably at least 50 nucleotides, still more preferably at least 100 nucleotides, and most preferably at least 500 nucleotides of VGC2. A particularly preferred part of the VGC2 DNA is the sequence shown in
FIG. 11 , or a part thereof. Another particularly preferred part of the VGC2 DNA is the sequence shown inFIG. 12 , or a part thereof. - Advantageously, the part of the VGC2 DNA is a gene, or part thereof.
- Genes can be identified within the VGC2 region by statistical analysis of the open reading frames using computer programs known in the art. If an open reading frame is greater than about 100 codons it is likely to be a gene (although genes smaller than this are known). Whether an open reading frame corresponds to the polypeptide coding region of a gene can be determined experimentally. For example, a part of the DNA corresponding to the open reading frame may be used as a probe in a northern (RNA) blot to determine whether mRNA is expressed which hybridises to the said DNA; alternatively or additionally a mutation may be introduced into the open reading frame and the effect of the mutation on the phenotype of the microorganism can be determined. If the phenotype is changed then the open reading frame corresponds to a gene. Methods of identifying genes within a DNA sequence are known in the art.
- By “variant of said DNA or a variant of a part thereof” we include any variant as defined by the term “variant” in the seventh aspect of the invention.
- Thus, variants of VGC2 DNA of Salmonella typhimurium include equivalent genes, or parts thereof, from other Salmonella species, such as Salmonella typhi and Salmonella enterica, as well as equivalent genes, or parts thereof, from other bacteria such as other enteric bacteria.
- By “equivalent gene” we include genes which are functionally equivalent and those in which a mutation leads to a similar phenotype (such as avirulence). It will be appreciated that before the present invention VGC2 or the genes contained therein had not been identified and certainly not implicated in virulence determination.
- Thus, further aspects of the invention provide a mutant bacterium wherein if the bacterium normally contains a gene that is the same as or equivalent to a gene in VGC2, said gene is mutated or absent in said mutant bacterium; methods of making a mutant bacterium wherein if the bacterium normally contains a gene that is the same as or equivalent to a gene in VGC2, said gene is mutated or absent in said mutant bacterium. The following is a preferred method to inactivate a VGC2 gene. One first subclones the gene on a DNA fragment from a Salmonella lambda DNA library or other DNA library using a fragment of VGC2 as a probe in hybridisation experiments, and map the gene with respect to restriction enzyme sites and characterise the gene by DNA sequencing in Escherichia coli. Using restriction enzymes, one then introduces into the coding region of the gene a segment of DNA encoding resistance to an antibiotic (for example, kanamycin), possibly after deleting a portion of the coding region of the cloned gene by restriction enzymes. Methods and DNA constructs containing an antibiotic resistance marker are available to ensure that the inactivation of the gene of interest is preferably non-polar, that is to say, does not affect the expression of genes downstream from the gene of interest. The mutant version of the gene is then transferred from E. coli to Salmonella typhimurium using phage P22 transduction and transductants checked by Southern hybridisation for homologous recombination of the mutant gene into the chromosome.
- This approach is commonly used in Salmonella (and can be used in S. typhi), and further details can be found in many papers, including Galan et al (1992) 174, 4338-4349.
- Still further aspects provide a use of said mutant mutant bacterium in a vaccine; pharmaceutical compositions comprising said bacterium and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier; a polypeptide encoded by VGC2 DNA of Salmonella typhimurium or a part thereof, or a variant of a part thereof; a method of identifying a compound which reduces the ability of a bacterium to infect or cause disease in a host; a compound identifiable by said method; a molecule which selectively interacts with, and substantially inhibits the function of, a gene in VGC2 or a nucleic product thereof; and medical uses and pharmaceutical compositions thereof.
- The VGC2 DNA contains genes which have been identified by the methods of the first and second aspects of the invention as well as genes which have been identified by their location (although identifiable by the methods of the first and second aspects of the invention). These further aspects of the invention relate closely to the fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, ninth, tenth, eleventh, twelfth and thirteenth aspects of the invention and, accordingly, the information given in relation to those aspects, and preferences expressed in relation to those aspects, applies to these further aspects.
- It is preferred if the gene is from VGC2 or is an equivalent gene from another species of Salmonella such as S. typhi. It is preferred if the mutant bacterium is a S. typhimurium mutant or a mutant of another species of Salmonella such as S. typhi.
- It is believed that at least some of the genes in VGC2 confer the ability for the bacterium, such as S. typhimurium, to enter cells.
- The invention will now be described with reference to the following Examples and Figures wherein:
-
FIGS. 1A and 1B illustrate diagrammatically one particularly preferred method of the invention. -
FIG. 2 shows a Southern hybridisation analysis of DNA from 12 S. typhimurium exconjugants following digestion with EcoRV. The filter was probed with the kanamycin resistance gene of the mini-Tn5 transposon. -
FIG. 3 shows a colony blot hybridisation analysis of DNA from 48 S. typhimurium exconjugants from a half of a microtitre dish (A1-H6). The filter was hybridised with a probe comprising labelled amplified tags from DNA isolated from a pool of the first 24 colonies (A1-D6). -
FIGS. 4A through 4D show a DNA colony blot hybridisation analysis of 95 S. typhimurium exconjugants of a microtitre dish (A1-H11), which were injected into a mouse. Replicate filters were hybridised with labelled amplified tags from the pool (inoculum pattern), or with labelled amplified tags from DNA isolated from over 10,000 pooled colonies that were recovered from the spleen of the infected animal (spleen pattern). Colonies B6, A11 and C8 gave rise to weak hybridisation signals on both sets of filters. Hybridisation signals from colonies A3, C5, G3 (aroA), and F10 are present on the inoculum pattern but not on the spleen pattern. -
FIGS. 5A through 5D show the sequence of a Salmonella gene isolated using the method of the invention and a comparison to the Escherichia coli clp protease (SEQ ID NOS 39 and 40. -
FIGS. 6A through 6H show partial sequences of further Salmonella gene isolated using the method of the invention (SEQ ID Nos. 8 to 36). -
FIGS. 7A and 7B show the mapping of VGC2 on the S. typhimurium chromosome. (A) DNA probes from three regions of VGC2 were used in Southern hybridisation analysis of lysates from a set of S. typhimurium strains harbouring locked in Mud-P22 prophages. Lysates which hybridised to a 7.5 kb PstI fragment (probe A inFIG. 8 ) are shown. The other two probes used hybridised to the same lysates. (B) The insertion points and packaging directions of the phage are shown along with the map position in minutes (edition VIII, ref 22 in Example 4). The phage designations correspond to the following strains: 18P, TT15242; 18Q, 15241; 19P, TT15244; 19Q, TT15243; 20P, TT15246 and 20Q, TT15245 (Ref in Example 4). The locations of mapped genes are shown by horizontal bars and the approximate locations of other genes are indicated. -
FIGS. 8A, 8B , and 8C show a physical and genetic map of VGC2. (A) The positions of 16 transposon insertions are shown above the line. The extent of VGC2 is indicated by the thicker line. The position and direction of transcription of ORFs described in the text of Example 4 are shown by arrows below the line, together with the names of similar genes, with the exception ofORFs FIG. 7 and that of the 2.2 kb PstI/HindIII fragment (probe B) used as a probe inFIG. 10 are shown below the restriction map. The positions of Sequence 1 (described inFIG. 11 ) and Sequence 2 (described inFIG. 12 ) are shown by the thin arrows (labelledSequence 1 and Sequence 2). -
FIG. 9 describes mapping the boundaries of VGC2. (A) The positions of mapped genes atminutes 37 to 38 on the E. coli K12 chromosome are aligned with the corresponding region of the S. typhimurium LT2 chromosome (minutes 30 to 31). An expanded map of the VGC2 region is shown with 11 S. typhimurium (S. t.) DNA fragments used as probes (thick bars) and the restriction sites used to generate them: B, BamHI; C, ClaI; H, HindII; K, KpnI; P, PstI; N, NsiI and S, SalI. Probes that hybridised to E. coli K12 (E. c.) genomic DNA are indicated by +; those which failed to hybridise are indicated by −. -
FIGS. 10A and 10B show that VGC2 is conserved among and specific to the Salmonellae. Genomic DNA from Salmonella serovars and other pathogenic bacteria was restricted with PstI (A), HindII or EcoRV (B) and subjected to Southern hybridisation analysis, using a 2.2 kb PstI/HindIII fragment fromlambda clone 7 as a probe (probe BFIG. 2 ). The filters were hybridised and washed under stringent (A) or non-stringent (B) conditions. - FIGS. 11A through 11BW show the DNA sequence of “
Sequence 1” of VGC2 from the centre to the left-hand end (see the arrow labelledSequence 1 inFIG. 8 ). The DNA is translated in three forward reading frames (the amino acid sequences in the “a” reading frame are SEQ ID Nos. 45-187, the amino acid sequences in the “b” reading frame are SEQ ID Nos. 188-356, and the amino acid sequences in the “c” reading frame are SEQ ID Nos. 357-501) and the start and stop positions of putative genes and the transposon insertion positions for various mutants identified by STM are indicated (SEQ ID No 37). - As is conventional a * indicates a stop codon and standard nucleotide ambiguity codes are used where necessary.
-
FIGS. 12A through 12P show the DNA sequence of “Sequence 2” of VGC2 (cluster C) (see the arrow labelledSequence 2 inFIG. 8 ). The start and stop positions of putative genes, and the transposon insertion positions for various mutants identified by STM are indicated (SEQ ID No 38). - As is conventional a * indicates a stop codon and standard nucleotide ambiguity codes are used where necessary.
- FIGS. 7 to 12 are most relevant to Example 4.
- Salmonella typhimurium strain 12023 (equivalent to American Type Collection of Type Cultures (NCTC), Public Health Laboratory Service, Colindale, London, UK. A spontaneous nalidixic acid resistant mutant of this strain (12023 Nalr) was selected in our laboratory. Another derivative of strain 12023, CL1509 (aroA::Tn10) was a gift from Fred Heffron. Escherichia coli strains CC118 lambdapir (δ[ara-leu], araD, .DELTA.lacX74, galE, galK, phoA20, thi-1, rpsE, rpoB, argE(Am), recA1, lambdapir phage lysogen) and S17-1 lambdapir(Tpr, Smr, recA, thi, pro, hsdR−, M+, RP4:2-Tc:Mu:KmTn7, lambdapir) were gifts from Kenneth Timmis. E. coli DH5α was used for propagating pUC18 (Gibco-BRL) and Bluescript (Stratagene) plasmids containing S. typhimurium DNA. Plasmid pUTmini-Tn5Km2 (de Lorenzo et al, 1990) was a gift from Kenneth Timmis.
- The oligonucleotide pool RT1(5′-CTAGGTACCTACAACCTCAAGCTT-[NK]20-AAGCTTGGTTAGAATGGGTACCATG-3′) (SEQ ID No 1), and primers P2 (5′-TACCTACAACCTCAAGCT-3′) (SEQ ID No 2), P3 (5′-CATGGTACCCATTCTAAC-3′) (SEQ ID No 3), P4 (5′-TACCCATTCTAACCAAGC-3′) (SEQ ID No 4) and P5 (5′-CTAGGTACCTACAACCTC-3′) (SEQ ID No 5) were synthesized on a oligonucleotide synthesizer (Applied Biosystems, model 380B). Double stranded DNA tags were prepared from RT1 in a 100 μl volume PCR containing 1.5 mM MgCl2, 50 mM KCl, and 10 mM Tris-Cl (pH 8.0) with 200 pg of RT1 as target; 250 μM each dATP, dCTP, dGTP, dTTP; 100 pM of primers P3 and P5; and 2.5 U of Amplitaq (Perkin-Elmer Cetus). Thermal cycling conditions were 30 cycles of 95.degree. C. for 30 s, 50° C. for 45 s, and 72° C. for 10 s. The PCR product was gel purified (Sambrook et al, 1989), passed through an elutipD column (available from Schleicher and Schull) and digested with KpnI prior to ligation into pUC18 or pUTmini-Tn5Km2. For ligations, plasmids were digested with KpnI and dephosphorylated with calf intestinal alkaline phosphatase (Gibco-BRL). Linearized plasmid molecules were gel-purified (Sambrook et al, 1989) prior to ligation to remove any residual uncut plasmid DNA from the digestion. Ligation reactions contained approximately 50 ng each of plasmid and double stranded tag DNA in a 25 μl volume with 1 unit T4 DNA ligase (Gibco-BRL) in a buffer supplied with the enzyme.
- Ligations were carried out for 2 h at 24° C. To determine the proportion of bacterial colonies arising from either self ligation of the plasmid DNA or uncut plasmid DNA, a control reaction was carried out in which the double stranded tag DNA was omitted from the ligation reaction. This yielded no ampicillin resistant bacterial colonies following transformation of E. coli CC118 (Sambrook et al, 1989), compared with 185 colonies arising from a ligation reaction containing the double stranded tag DNA.
- The products of several ligations between pUT mini-Tn5Km2 and the double stranded tag DNA were used to transform E. coli CC118 (Sambrook et al, 1989). A total of approximately 10,300 transformants were pooled and plasmid DNA extracted from the pool was used to transform E. coli S-17 lambdapir (de Lorenzo & Timmis, 1994). For mating experiments, a pool of approximately 40,000 ampicillin resistant E. coli S-17 lambdapir transformants, and S. typhimurium 12023 Nalr were cultured separately to an optical density (OD)580 of 1.0. Aliquots of each culture (0.4 ml) were mixed in 5
ml 10 mM MgSO4, and filtered through a Millipore membrane (0.45 μm diameter). The filters were placed on the surface of agar containing M9 salts (de Lorenzo & Timmis, 1994) and incubated at 37.degree. C. for 16 h. The bacteria were recovered by shaking the filters in liquid LB medium for 40 min at 37° C. and exconjugants were selected by plating the suspension onto LB medium containing 100 μg ml−1 nalidixic acid (to select against the donor strain) and 50 μg ml−1 kanamycin (to select for the recipient strain). Each exconjugant was checked by transferring nalidixic acid resistant (nalr), kanamycin resistant (kanr) colonies to MacConkey Lactose indicator medium (to distinguish between E. coli and S. typhimurium), and to LB medium containing ampicillin. Approximately 90% of the nalr, kanr colonies were sensitive to ampicillin, indicating that these resulted from authentic transposition events (de Lorenzo & Timmis, 1994). Individual ampicillin-sensitive exconjugants were stored in 96 well microtitre dishes containing LB medium. For long term storage at −80° C., either 7% DMSO or 15% glycerol was included in the medium. - Mutants were replica plated from microtitre dishes onto solid medium containing M9 salts and 0.4% glucose (Sambrook et al, 1989) to identify auxotrophs. Mutants with rough colony morphology were detected by low magnification microscopy of colonies on agar plates.
- For colony blot hybridizations, a 48-well metal replicator (Sigma) was used to transfer exconjugants from microtitre dishes to Hybond N nylon filters (Amersham, UK) that had been placed on the surface of LB agar containing 50 μg ml−1 kanamycin. After overnight incubation at 37° C., the filters supporting the bacterial colonies were removed and dried at room temperature for 10 min. The bacteria were lysed with 0.4 N NaOH and the filters washed with 0.5 N Tris-Cl pH 7.0 according to the filter manufacturer's instructions. The bacterial DNA was fixed to the filters by exposure to UV light from a Stratalinker (Stratagene). Hybridisations to 32P-labelled probes were carried out under stringent conditions as previously described (Holden et al, 1989). For DNA extractions, S. typhimurium transposon mutant strains were grown in liquid LB medium in microtitre dishes or resuspended in LB medium following growth on solid media. Total DNA was prepared by the hexadecyltrimethylammoniumbromide (CTAB) method according to Ausubel et al (1987). Briefly, cells from 150 to 1000 μl volumes were precipitated by centrifugation and resuspended in 576 μl TE. To this was added 15 μl of 20% SDS and 3 μl of 20 mg ml−1 proteinase K. After incubating at 37° C. for 1 hour, 166 μl of 3 M NaCl was added and mixed thoroughly, followed by 80 μl of 10% (w/v) CTAB and 0.7 M NaCl. After thorough mixing, the solution was incubated at 65° C. for 10 min. Following extraction with phenol and phenol chloroform, the DNA was precipitated by addition of isopropanol, washed with 70% ethanol and resuspended in TE at a concentration of approximately 1 μg μl−1.
- The DNA samples were subjected to two rounds of PCR to generate labelled probes. The first PCR was performed in 100 μl reactions containing 20 mM Tris-Cl pH 8.3; 50 mM KCl; 2 mM MgCl2; 0.01
% Tween 80; 200 μM each dATP, dCTP, dGTP, dTTP; 2.5 units of Amplitaq polymerase (Perkin-Elmer Cetus); 770 ng each primer P2 and P4; and 5 μg target DNA. After an initial denaturation of 4 min at 95.degree. C., thermal cycling consisted of 20 cycles of 45 s at 50° C., 10 s at 72° C., and 30 s at 95° C. PCR products were extracted with chloroform/isoamyl alcohol (24/1) and precipitated with ethanol. DNA was resuspended in 10 .mu.l TE and the PCR products were purified by electrophoresis through a 1.6% Seaplaque (FMC Bioproducts) gel in TAE buffer. Gel slices containing fragments of about 80 bp were excised and used for the second PCR. This reaction was carried out in a 20 .mu.l total volume, and contained 20 mM Tris-Cl pH 8.3; 50 mM KCl; 2 mM MgCl2; 0.01% Tween 80; 50 μM each dATP, dTTP, dGTP; 10 μl 32P-dCTP (3000 Ci/mmol, Amersham); 150 ng each primer P2 and P4; approximately 10 ng of target DNA (1-2 μl of 1.6% Seaplaque agarose containing the first round PCR product); 0.5 units of Amplitaq polymerase. The reaction was overlayed with 20 .mu.l mineral oil and thermal cycling was performed as described above. Incorporation of the radioactive label was quantitated by absorbance to Whatman DE81 paper (Sambrook et al, 1989). - Individual Salmonella exconjugants containing tagged transposons were grown in 2% tryptone, 1% yeast extract, 0.92% v/v glycerol, 0.5% Na2PO4, 1% KNO3 (TYGPN medium) (Ausubel et al, 1987) in microtitre plates overnight at 37° C. A metal replicator was used to transfer a small volume of the overnight cultures to a fresh microtitre plate and the cultures were incubated at 37° C. until the OD580 (measured using a Titertek Multiscan microtitre plate reader) was approximately 0.2 in each well. Cultures from individual wells were then pooled and the OD550 determined using a spectrophotometer. The culture was diluted in sterile saline to approximately 5×105 cfu ml−1. Further dilutions were plated out onto TYGPN containing nalidixic acid (100 mg ml−1) and kanamycin (50 mg ml−1) to confirm the cfu present in the inoculum.
- Groups of three female BALB/c mice (20-25 g) were injected intraperitoneally with 0.2 ml of bacterial suspension containing approximately 1×105 cfu ml−1. Mice were sacrificed three days post-inoculation and their spleens were removed to recover bacteria. Half of each spleen was homogenized in 1 ml of sterile saline in a microfuge tube. Cellular debris was allowed to settle and 1 ml of saline containing cells still in suspension was removed to a fresh tube and centrifuged for two minutes in a microfuge. The supernatant was aspirated and the pellet resuspended in 1 ml of sterile distilled water. A dilution series was made in sterile distilled water and 100 ml of each dilution was plated onto TYGPN agar containing nalidixic acid (100 μg ml−1) and kanamycin (50 ug ml−1). Bacteria were recovered from plates containing between 1000 and 4000 colonies, and a total of over 10,000 colonies recovered from each spleen were pooled and used to prepare DNA for PCR generation of probes to screen colony blots.
- Total DNA was isolated from S. typhimurium exconjugants and digested separately with SstI, SalI, PstI and SphI. Digests were fractionated through agarose gels, transferred to Hybond N+ membranes (Amersham) and subjected to Southern hybridisation analysis using the kanamycin resistance gene of pUT mini-Tn5Km2 as a probe. The probe was labelled with digoxygenin (Boehringer-Mannheim) and chemiluminescence detection was carried out according to the manufacturer's instructions. The hybridisation and washing conditions were as described above. Restriction enzymes which gave rise to hybridising fragments in the 3-5 kb range were used to digest DNA for a preparative agarose gel, and DNA fragments corresponding to the sizes of the hybridisation signals were excised from this, purified and ligated into pUC18. Ligation reactions were used to transform E. coli DH5a to kanamycin resistance. Plasmids from kanamycin-resistant transformants were purified by passage through an elutipD column and checked by restriction enzyme digestion. Plasmid inserts were partially sequenced by the di-deoxy method (Sanger et al, 1977) using the -40 primer and reverse sequencing primer (United States Biochemical Corporation) and the primers P6 (5′-CCTAGGCGGCCAGATCTGAT-3′) (SEQ ID No 6) and P7 (5′GCACTTGTGTATAAGAGTCAG-3′) (SEQ ID No 7) which anneal to the I and O termini of Tn5, respectively. Nucleotide sequences and deduced amino acid sequences were assembled using the Macvector 3.5 software package run on a Macintosh SE/30 computer. Sequences were compared with the EMBL and Genbank DNA databases using the UNIX/SUN computer system at the Human Genome Mapping Project Resource Centre, Harrow, UK.
- The structure of the DNA tags is shown in
FIG. 1 a. Each tag consists of a variable central region flanked by “arms”, of invariant sequence. The central region sequence ([NK]20) was designed to prevent the occurrence of sites for the commonly used 6 bp-recognition restriction enzymes, but is sufficiently variable to ensure that statistically, the same sequence should only occur once in 2×1011 molecules (DNA sequencing of 12 randomly selected tags showed that none shared more than 50% identity over the variable region). (N means any base (A, G, C or T) and K means G or T.) The arms contain KpnI sites close to the ends to facilitate the initial cloning step, and the HindIII sites bordering the variable region were used to release radiolabelled variable regions from the arms prior to hybridisation analysis. The arms were also designed such that primers P2 and P4 each contain only one guanine residue. Therefore during a PCR using these primers, only one cytosine will be incorporated into each newly synthesised arm, compared to an average of ten in the unique sequence. When radiolabelled dCTP is included in the PCR, an average of ten-fold more label will be present in the unique sequence compared with each arm. This is intended to minimise background hybridisation signals from the arms, after they have been released from the unique sequences by digestion with HindIII. Double stranded tags were ligated into the KpnI site of the mini-Tn5 transposon Km2, carried on plasmid pUT (de Lorenzo & Timmis, 1994). Replication of this plasmid is dependent on the R6K-specified .pi. product of the pir gene. It carries the oriT sequence of the RP4 plasmid, permitting transfer to a variety of bacterial species (Miller & Mekalanos, 1988), and the tnp gene needed for transposition of the mini-Tn5 element. The tagged mini-Tn5 transposons were transferred to S. typhimurium by conjugation, and 288 exconjugants resulting from transposition events were stored in the wells of microtitre dishes. Total DNA isolated from 12 of these was digested with EcoRV, and subjected to Southern hybridisation analysis using the kanamycin resistance gene of the mini-Tn5 transposon as a probe. In each case, the exconjugant had arisen as a result a single integration of the transposon into a different site of the bacterial genome (FIG. 2 ). - We next determined the efficiency and uniformity of amplification of the DNA tags in PCRs involving pools of exconjugant DNAs as targets for the reactions. In an attempt to minimise unequal amplification of tags in the PCR, we determined the maximum quantity of DNA target that could be used in a 100 μl reaction, and the minimum number of PCR cycles, that resulted in products which could be visualised by ethidium bromide staining of an agarose gel (5 μg DNA and 20 cycles, respectively).
- S. typhimurium exconjugants which had reached stationary growth phase in microtitre dishes were combined, and used to extract DNA. This was subjected to a PCR using primers P2 and P4. PCR products of 80 bp were gel-purified and used as targets for a second PCR, using the same primers but with 32P-labelled CTP. This resulted in over 60% of the radiolabelled dCTP being incorporated into the PCR products. The radiolabelled products were digested with HindIII and used to probe colony blotted DNA from their corresponding microtitre dishes. Of the 1510 mutants tested in this way, 358 failed to yield a clear signal on an autoradiogram following an overnight exposure of the colony blot. There are three potential explanations for this. Firstly, it is possible that a proportion of the transposons did not carry tags. However, by comparing the transformation frequencies resulting from ligation reactions involving the transposon in the presence or absence of tags, it seems unlikely that untagged transposons could account for more than approximately 0.5% of the total (see Materials and Methods). More probable causes are that the variable sequence was truncated in some of the tags, and/or that some of the sequences formed secondary structures, both of which might have prevented amplification. Mutants which failed to give clear signals were not included in further studies. The specificity of the efficiently amplifiable tags was demonstrated by generating a probe from 24 colonies of a microtitre dish, and using it to probe a colony blot of 48 colonies, which included the 24 used to generate the probe. The lack of any hybridisation signal from the 24 colonies not used to generate the probe (
FIG. 3 ) shows that the hybridisation conditions employed were sufficiently stringent to prevent cross-hybridisation among labelled tags, and suggests that each exconjugant is not reiterated within a microtitre dish. - There are further considerations in determining the maximum pool size that can be used as an inoculum in animal experiments. As the quantity of labelled tag for each transposon is inversely proportional to the complexity of the tag pool, there is a limit to the pool size above which hybridisation signals become too weak to be detected after overnight exposure of an autoradiogram. More importantly, as the complexity of the pool increases, so must the likelihood of failure of a virulent representative of the pool to be present in sufficient numbers, in the spleen of an infected animal, to produce enough labelled probe. We have not determined the upper limit for pool size in the murine model of salmonellosis that we have employed, but it must be in excess of 96.
- A total of 1152 uniquely tagged insertion mutants (from two microtitre dishes) were tested for virulence in BALB/c mice in twelve pools, each representing a 96-well microtitre dish. Animals received an intraperitoneal injection of approximately 103 cells of each of 96 transposon mutants of a microtitre dish (105 organisms in total). Three days after injection mice were sacrificed, and bacteria were recovered by plating spleen homogenates onto laboratory medium. Approximately 10,000 colonies recovered from each mouse were pooled and DNA was extracted. The tags present in this DNA sample were amplified and labelled by the PCR, and colony blots probed and compared with the hybridisation pattern obtained using tags amplified from the inoculum (
FIG. 3 ). As a control, an aroA mutant of S. typhimurium was tagged and employed as one of the 96 mutants in the inoculum. This strain would not be expected to be recovered in the spleen because its virulence is severely attenuated (Buchmeier et al, 1993). Forty-one mutants were identified whose DNA hybridized to labelled tags from the inoculum but not from labelled tags from bacteria recovered from the spleen. The experiment was repeated and the same forty-one mutants were again identified. Two of these were the aroa mutant (one per pool), as expected. Another was an auxotrophic mutant (it failed to grow on minimal medium). All of the mutants had normal colony morphology. - DNA was extracted from one of the mutants described in Example 1 (
Pool 1, F10), digested with SstI, and subcloned on the basis of kanamycin resistance. The sequence of 450 bp flanking one end of the transposon was determined using primer P7. This sequence shows 80% identity to the E. coli clp (Ion) gene, which encodes a heat-regulated protease (FIG. 5 ; SEQ ID NOS 39 and 40). To our knowledge, this gene has not previously been implicated as a virulence determinant. - Partial sequences of thirteen further Salmonella typhimurium virulence genes are shown in
FIG. 6 (sequences A2 to A9 and B1 to B5; SEQ ID NOS 8-36). Deduced amino acid sequences of P2D6, S4C3, P3F4, P7G2 and P9B7 bear similarities to a family of secretion-associated proteins that have been conserved throughout bacterial pathogens of animals and plants, and which are known in Salmonella as the inv family. In S. typhimurium the inv genes are required for bacterial invasion into intestinal tissue. The virulence of inv mutants is attenuated when they are inoculated by the oral route, but not when they are administered intraperitoneally. The discovery of inv-related genes that are required for virulence following intraperitoneal inoculation suggests a new secretion apparatus which might be required for invasion of non-phagocytic cells of the spleen and other organs. The products of these new genes might represent better drug targets than the inv proteins in the treatment of established infections. - Further characterisation of the genes identified in this example is described in Example 4.
- Mutations identified by the method of the invention attenuate virulence.
- Five of the mutations in genes not previously implicated in virulence were transferred by P22-mediated transduction to the nalidixic acid-sensitive parent strain of S. typhimurium 12028. Transductants were checked by restriction mapping then injected by the intraperitoneal route into groups of BALB/c mice to determine their 50% lethal dose (LD50). The LD50 values for mutants S4C3, P7G2, P3F4 and P9B7 were all several orders of magnitude higher than that of the wild-type strain. No difference in the LD50 was detected for mutant P1F10; however, there was a statistically significant decrease in the proportion of P1F10 cells recovered from the spleens of mice injected with an inoculum consisting of an equal proportion of this strain and the wild-type strain. This implies that this mutation does attenuate virulence, but to a degree that is not detectable by LD50.
- Mutants P3F4 and P9B7 were also administered by the oral route at an inoculum level of 107 cells/mouse. None of the mice became ill, indicating that the oral LD50 levels of these mutants are at least an order of magnitude higher than that of the wild-type strain.
- In the mouse vaccination study groups of five female BALB/c mice of 20-25 g in mass were initially inoculated orally (p.o.) or intraperitoneally (i.p.) with serial ten fold dilutions of Salmonella typhimurium mutant strains P3F4 and P9B7. After four weeks the mice were then inoculated with 500 c.f.u. of the parental wild type strain. Deaths were then recorded over four weeks.
- A group of two mice of the same age and batch as the mice inoculated with the mutant strains were also inoculated i.p. with 500 c.f.u. of the wild type strain as a positive control. Both non-immunised mice died as expected within four weeks.
- Results are tabulated below:
initial inoculum in no. mice surviving no. mice survivin#g c.f.u. first challenge wild type challenge 1) p.o. initial inoculation with mutant strain P3F4 5 × 109 5 2 (40%) 5 × 108 5 2 (40%) 5 × 107 5 0 (0%) 2) i.p. initial inoculum with mutant strain P3F4 5 × 106 3 3 (100%) 5 × 105 5 4 (80%) 5 × 104 6 5 (83%) 5 × 103 5 4 (80%) 3) p.o. initial inoculum with mutant strain P9B7 5 × 109 5 0 (0%) 4) i.p. initial inoculum with mutant P9B7 5 × 106 4 2 (50%) - From these experiments I conclude that mutant P3P4 appears to give some protection against subsequent wild type challenge. This protection appears greater in mice that were immunised i.p.
- Abbreviations used in this Example are VGC1,
virulence gene cluster 1; VGC2,virulence gene cluster 2. - Salmonella typhimurium is a principal agent of gastroenteritis in humans and produces a systemic illness in mice which serves as a model for human typhoid fever (1). Following oral inoculation of mice with S. typhimurium, the bacteria pass from the lumen of the small intestine through the intestinal mucosa, via enterocytes or M cells of the Peyer's patch follicles (2). The bacteria then invade macrophages and neutrophils, enter the reticuloendothelial system and disseminate to other organs, including the spleen and liver, where further reproduction results in an overwhelming and fatal bacteremia (3). To invade host cells, to survive and replicate in a variety of physiologically stressful intracellular and extracellular environments and to circumvent the specific antibacterial activities of the immune system, S. typhimurium employs a sophisticated repertoire of virulence factors (4).
- To gain a more comprehensive understanding of virulence mechanisms of S. typhimurium and other pathogens the transposon mutagenesis system described in Example 1, which is conveniently called ‘signature-tagged mutagenesis’ (STM), which combines the strength of mutational analysis with the ability to follow simultaneously the fate of a large number of different mutants within a single animal (5 and Example 1;
Reference 5 was published after the priority date for this invention). Using this approach we identified 43 mutants with attenuated virulence from a total of 1152 mutants that were screened. The nucleotide sequences of DNA flanking the insertion points of transposons in 5 of these mutants showed that they were related to genes encoding type III secretion systems of a variety of bacterial pathogens (6, 7). The products of the inv/spa gene cluster of S. typhimurium (8, 9) are proteins that form a type III secretion system required for the assembly of surface appendages mediating entry into epithelial cells (10). Hence the virulence of strains carrying mutations in the inv/spa cluster is attenuated only if the inoculum is administered orally and not when given intraperitoneally (8). In contrast the 5 mutants identified by STM are avirulent following intraperitoneal inoculation (5). - In this example we show that the transposon insertion points of these 5 mutants and an additional 11 mutants identified by STM all map to the same region of the S. typhimurium chromosome. Further analysis of this region reveals additional genes whose deduced products have sequence similarity to other components of type III secretion systems. This chromosomal region which we refer to as virulence gene cluster 2 (VGC2) is not present in a number of other enteric bacteria, and represents an important locus for S. typhimurium virulence.
- Bacterial Strains, Transduction and Growth Media. Salmonella enterica serotypes 5791 (aberdeen), 423180 (gallinarum), 7101 (cubana) and 12416 (typhimurium LT2) were obtained from the National Collections of Type Cultures, Public Health Laboratory Service, UK. Salmonella typhi BRD123 genomic DNA was a gift from G. Dougan, enteropathogenic Escherichia coli (EPEC), enterohemorrhagic E. coli (EHEC), Vibrio cholera biotype El Tor,
Shigella flexneri serotype 2 and Staphylococcus aureus were clinical isolates obtained from the Department of Infectious Diseases and Bacteriology, Royal Postgraduate Medical School, UK. Genomic DNA from Yersinia pestis was a gift from J. Heesemann. However, genomic DNA can be isolated using standard methods. The bacterial strains and the methods used to generate signature-tagged mini-Tn5 transposon mutants of S. typhimurium NCTC strain 12023 have been described previously (5, 11). Routine propagation of plasmids was in E. coli DH5.alpha. Bacteria were grown in LB broth (12) supplemented with the appropriate antibiotics. Before virulence levels of individual mutant strains were assessed, the mutations were first transferred by phage P22 mediated transduction (12) to the nalidixic acid sensitive parental strain of S. typhimurium 12023. Transductants were analysed by restriction digestion and Southern hybridisation before use as inoculum. - Lambda Library Screening. Lambda (lambda) clones with overlapping insert DNAs covering VGC2 were obtained by standard methods (13) from a lambda1059 library (14) containing inserts from a partial Sau3A digest of S. typhimurium LT2 genomic DNA. The library was obtained via K. Sanderson, from the Salmonella Genetic Stock Centre (SGSC), Calgary, Canada.
- Mud-P22 Lysogens. Radiolabelled DNA probes were hybridised to Hybond N (Amersham) filters bearing DNA prepared from lysates of a set of S. typhimurium strains harbouring Mud-P22 prophages at known positions in the S. typhimurium genome. Preparation of mitomycin-induced Mud-P22 lysates was as described (12, 15). The set of Mud-P22 prophages was originally assembled by Benson and Goldman (16) and was obtained from the SGSC.
- Gel Electrophoresis and Southern Hybridisation. Gel electrophoresis was performed in 1% or 0.6% agarose gels run in 0.5×TBE. Gel fractionated DNA was transferred to Hybond N or N+ membranes (Amersham) and stringent hybridisation and washing procedures (permitting hybridisation between nucleotide sequences with 10% or less mismatches) were as described by Holden et al, (17). For non-stringent conditions (permitting hybridisation between sequences with 50% mismatches) filters were hybridised overnight at 42° C. in 10% formamide/0.25 M Na2 HPO4/7% SDS and the most stringent step was with 20 mM Na2 HPO4/1% SDS at 42° C. DNA fragments used as probes were labelled with [32P]dCTP using the ‘Radprime’ system (Gibco-BRL) or with [digoxigenin-11]dUTP and detected using the Digoxigenin system (Boehringer Mannheim) according to the manufacturers' instructions, except that hybridisation was performed in the same solution as that used for radioactively labelled probes. Genomic DNA was prepared for Southern hybridisation as described previously (13).
- Molecular Cloning and Nucleotide Sequencing. Restriction endonucleases and T4 DNA ligase were obtained from Gibco-BRL. General molecular biology techniques were as described in Sambrook et al, (18). Nucleotide sequencing was performed by the dideoxy chain termination method (19) using a T7 sequencing kit (Pharmacia). Sequences were assembled with the MacVector 3.5 software or AssemblyLIGN packages. Nucleotide and derived amino acid sequences were compared with those in the European Molecular Biology Laboratory (EMBL) and SwissProt databases using the BLAST and FASTA programs of the GCG package from the University of Wisconsin (version 8) (20) on the network service at the Human Genome Mapping Project Resource Centre, Hinxton, UK.
- Virulence Tests. Groups of five female BALB/c mice (20-25 g) were inoculated orally (p.o.) or intraperitoneally (i.p.) with 10-fold dilutions of bacteria suspended in physiological saline. For preparation of the inoculum, bacteria were grown overnight at 37° C. in LB broth with shaking (50 rpm) and then used to inoculate fresh medium for various lengths of time until an optical density (OD) at 560 nm of 0.4 to 0.6 had been reached. For cell densities of 5×108 colony forming units (cfu) per ml and above, cultures were concentrated by centrifugation and resuspended in saline. The concentration of cfu/ml was checked by plating a dilution series of the inoculum onto LB agar plates. Mice were inoculated i.p. with 0.2 ml volumes and p.o. by gavage with the same volume of inoculum. The LD50 values were calculated after 28 days by the method of Reed and Meunch (21).
- Localisation of Transposon Insertions. The generation of a bank of Salmonella typhimurium mini Tn5 transposon mutants and the screen used to identify 43 mutants with attenuated virulence have been described previously (5). Transposons and flanking DNA regions were cloned from exconjugants by selection for kanamycin resistance or by inverse PCR. Nucleotide sequences of 300-600 bp of DNA flanking the transposons were obtained for 33 mutants. Comparison of these sequences with those in the DNA and protein databases indicated that 14 mutants resulted from transposon insertions into previously known virulence genes, 7 arose from insertions into new genes with similarity to known genes of the enterobacteria and 12 resulted from insertions into sequences without similarity to entries in the DNA and protein databases (ref. 5, Example 1 and this Example).
- Three lines of evidence suggested that 16 of 19 transposon insertions into new sequences were clustered in three regions of the genome, initially designated A, B and C. First, comparing nucleotide sequences from regions flanking transposon insertion points with each other and with those in the databases showed that some sequences overlapped with one another or had strong similarity to different regions of the same gene. Second, Southern analysis of genomic DNA digested with several restriction enzymes and probed with restriction fragments flanking transposon insertion points indicated that some transposon insertions were located on the same restriction fragments. Third, when the same DNA probes were hybridised to plaques from a S. typhimurium lambda DNA library, the probes from mutants which the previous two steps had suggested might be linked were found to hybridise to the same lambda DNA clones. Thus two mutants (P9B7 and P12F5) were assigned to cluster A, five mutants (P2D6, P9B6, P11C3, P11D10 and P11H10) to cluster B and nine mutants (P3F4, P4F8, P7A3, P7B8, P7G2, P8G12, P9G4, P10E11 and P11B9) to cluster C (
FIG. 8 ). - Hybridisation of DNA probes from these three clusters to lysates from a set of S. typhimurium strains harbouring locked-in Mud-P22 prophages (15, 16) showed that the three loci were all located in the minute 30 to 31 region (edition VIII, ref. 22) (
FIG. 7 ), indicating that the three loci were closely linked or constituted one large virulence locus. To determine if any of the lambda clones covering clusters A, B and C contained overlapping DNA inserts, DNA fragments from the terminal regions of each clone were used as probes in Southern hybridisation analysis of the other lambda clones. Hybridising DNA fragments showed that several lambda clones overlap and that clusters A, B and C comprise one contiguous region (FIG. 8 ). DNA fragments from the ends of this region were then used to probe the lambda library to identify further clones containing inserts representing the adjacent regions. No lambda clones were identified that covered the extreme right hand terminus of the locus so this region was obtained by cloning a 6.5 kb EcoRI/XbaI fragment from a lysate of the Mud-P22 prophage strain TT15244 (16). - Restriction mapping and Southern hybridisation analysis were then used to construct a physical map of this locus (
FIG. 8 ). To distinguish this locus from the well characterised inv/spa gene cluster at minute 63 (edition VIII, ref. 22) (8, 9, 23, 24, 25, 26), we refer to the latter as virulence gene cluster 1 (VGC 1) and have termed the new virulence locus VGC2.FIG. 8 shows the position of two portions of DNA whose nucleotide sequence has been determined (“Sequence 1” and “Sequence 2”). The nucleotide sequence is shown inFIGS. 11 and 12 . Mapping the boundaries of VGC2 on the S. typhimurium chromosome. Nucleotide sequencing oflambda clone 7 at the left hand side of VGC2 revealed the presence of an open reading frame (ORF) whose deduced amino acid sequence is over 90% identical to the derived product of a segment of the ydhE.dagger-dbl. gene of E. coli and sequencing of the 6.5 kb EcoRI/XbaI cloned fragment on the right hand side of VGC2 revealed the presence of an ORF whose predicted amino acid sequence is over 90% identical to pyruvate kinase I of E. coli encoded by the pykF gene (27). On the E. coli chromosome ydhE and pykF are located close to one another, atminute 37 to 38 (28). Eleven non-overlapping DNA fragments distributed along the length of VGC2 were used as probes in non-stringent Southern hybridisation analysis of E. coli and S. typhimurium genomic DNA. Hybridising DNA fragments showed that a region of approximately 40 kb comprising VGC2 was absent from the E. coli genome and localised the boundaries of VGC2 to within 1 kb (FIG. 9 ). Comparison of the location of the XbaI site close to the right hand end of VGC2 (FIG. 8 ) with a map of known XbaI sites (29) at the minute 30 region of the chromosome (22) enables a map position of 30.7 minutes to be deduced for VGC2. - Structure of VGC2. Nucleotide sequencing of portions of VGC2 has revealed the presence of 19 ORFs (
FIG. 8 ). The G+C content of approximately 26 kb of nucleotide sequence within VGC2 is 44.6%, compared to 47% for VGC1 (9) and 51-53% estimated for the entire Salmonella genome (30). - The complete deduced amino acid sequences of ORFs 1-11 are similar to those of proteins of type III secretion systems (6, 7), which are known to be required for the export of virulence determinants in a variety of bacterial pathogens of plants and animals (7). The predicted proteins of ORFs 1-8 (
FIG. 8 ) are similar in organisation and sequence to the products of the yscN-U genes of Yersinia pseudotuberculosis (31), to invC/spaS of the inv/spa cluster inVGC 1 of Salmonella typhimurium (8, 9) and to spa47/spa40 of the spa/mxi cluster of Shigella flexneri (32, 33, 34, 35,). For example the predicted amino acid sequence of ORF 3 (FIG. 8 ) is 50% identical to YscS of Y. pseudotuberculosis (31), 34% identical to Spa9 from S. flexneri (35) and 37% identical to SpaQ ofVGC 1 of S. typhimurium (9). The predicted protein product of ORF9 is closely related to the LcrD family of proteins with 43% identity to LcrD of Y. enterocolitica (36), 39% identity to MxiA of S. flexneri (32) and 40% identity to InvA of VGC1 (23). Partial nucleotide sequences for the remaining ORFs shown inFIG. 8 indicate that the predicted protein from ORF10 is most similar to Y. enterocolitica YscJ (37) a lipoprotein located in the bacterial outer membrane, withORF 11 similar to S. typhimurium InvG, a member of the PulD family of translocases (38). ORF12 and ORF13 show significant similarity to the sensor and regulatory subunits respectively, from a variety of proteins comprising two component regulatory systems (39). There is ample coding capacity for further genes betweenORFs ORFs ORF 19 and the right hand end of VGC2. - VGC2 is conserved among and is specific to the Salmonellae. A 2.2 kb PstI/HindIII fragment located at the centre of VGC2 (probe B,
FIG. 8 ) lacking sequence similarity to entries in the DNA and protein databases was used as a probe in Southern hybridisation analysis of genomic DNA from Salmonella serovars and other pathogenic bacteria (FIG. 10A ). DNA fragments hybridising under non-stringent conditions showed that VGC2 is present in S. aberdeen, S. gallinarum, S. cubana, S. typhi and is absent from EPEC, EHEC, Y. pestis, S. flexneri, V cholera and S. aureus. Thus VGC2 is conserved among and is likely to be specific to the Salmonellae. - To determine if the organisation of the locus is conserved among the Salmonella serovars tested, stringent Southern hybridisations with genomic DNA digested with two further restriction enzymes were carried out. Hybridising DNA fragments showed that there is some heterogeneity in the arrangement of restriction sites between S. typhimurium LT2 and S. gallinarum, S. cubana and S. typhi (
FIG. 10B ). Furthermore, S. gallinarum and S. typhi contain additional hybridising fragments to those present in the other Salmonellae examined, suggesting that regions of VGC2 have been duplicated in these species. - VGC2 is required for virulence in mice. Previous experiments showed that the LD50 values for i.p. inoculation of transposon mutants P3F4, P7G2, P9B7 and P 11C3 were at least 100-fold greater than the wild type strain (5). In order to clarify the importance of VGC2 in the process of infection, the p.o. and i.p. LD50 values for mutants P3F4 and P9B7 were determined (Table 1). Both mutants showed a reduction in virulence of at least five orders of magnitude by either route of inoculation in comparison with the parental strain. This profound attenuation of virulence by both routes of inoculation demonstrates that VGC2 is required for events in the infective process after epithelial cell penetration in BALB/c mice.
TABLE 1 LD50 values of S. typhimurium strains. LD50 (cfu) Strain i.p. p.o. 12023 wild type 4.2 6.2 × 104 P3F4 1.5 × 106 >5 × 109 P9B7 >1.5 × 106 >5 × 109
cfu, colony forming units
- A hitherto unknown virulence locus in S. typhimurium of approximately 40 kb located at minute 30.7 on the chromosome by mapping the insertion points of a group of signature-tagged transposon mutants with attenuated virulence has been identified (5). This locus is referred to as virulence gene cluster 2 (VGC2) to distinguish it from the inv/spa virulence genes at 63 minutes (edition VIII, ref. 22) which we suggest be renamed
VGC 1.VGC 1 and VGC2 both encode components of type III secretion systems. However, these secretion systems are functionally distinct. - Of 19 mutants that arose from insertions into new genes (ref. 5 and this example) 16 mapped to the same region of the chromosome. It is possible that mini-Tn5 insertion occurs preferentially in VGC2. Alternatively, as the negative selection used to identify mutants with attenuated virulence (5) was very stringent (reflected by the high LD50 values for VGC2 mutants) it is possible that, among the previously unknown genes, only mutations in those of VGC2 result in a degree of attenuation sufficient to be recovered in the screen. The failure of previous searches for S. typhimurium virulence determinants to identify VGC2 might stem from reliance on cell culture assays rather than a live animal model of infection. A previous study which identified regions of the S. typhimurium LT2 chromosome unique to Salmonellae (40) located one such region (RF333) to minutes 30.5-32. Therefore, RF333 may correspond to VGC2, although it was not known that RF333 was involved in virulence determination.
- Comparisons with the type III secretion systems encoded by the virulence plasmids of Yersinia and Shigella as well as with
VGC 1 of Salmonella indicates that VGC2 encodes the basic structural components of the secretory apparatus. Furthermore, the order of ORFs 1-8 in VGC2 is the same as the gene order in homologues in Yersinia, Shigella and VGC1 of S. typhimurium. The fact that the organisation and structure of the VGC2 secretion system is no more closely related to VGC1 than to the corresponding genes of Yersinia, together with the low G+C content of VGC2 suggests that VGC2, like VGC1 (40, 41, 42) was acquired independently by S. typhimurium via horizontal transmission. The proteins encoded byORFs - Many genes in VGC1 have been shown to be important for entry of S. typhimurium into epithelial cells. This process requires bacterial contact (2) and results in cytoskeletal rearrangements leading to localised membrane ruffling (43, 44). The role of VGC1 and its restriction to this stage of the infection is reflected in the approximately 50-fold attenuation of virulence in BALB/c mice inoculated p.o. with VGC1 mutants and by the fact that VGC1 mutants show no loss of virulence when administered i.p. (8). The second observation also explains why no VGC1 mutants were obtained in our screen (5). In contrast, mutants in VGC2 are profoundly attenuated following both p.o. and i.p. inoculation. This shows that, unlike VGC1, VGC2 is required for virulence in mice after epithelial cell penetration, but these findings do not exclude a role for VGC1 in this early stage of infection.
- Thus in summary mapping the insertion points of 16 signature-tagged transposon mutants on the Salmonella typhimurium chromosome led to the identification of a 40 kb virulence gene cluster at minute 30.7. This locus is conserved among all other Salmonella species examined, but not present in a variety of other pathogenic bacteria or in Escherichia coli K12. Nucleotide sequencing of a portion of this locus revealed 11 open reading frames whose predicted proteins encode components of a type III secretion system. To distinguish between this and the type III secretion system encoded by the inv/spa invasion locus we refer to the inv/spa locus as virulence gene cluster 1 (VGC1) and the new locus as VGC2. VGC2 has a lower G+C content than that of the Salmonella genome and is flanked by genes whose products share greater than 90% identity with those of the E. coli ydhE and pykF genes. Thus VGC2 was probably acquired horizontally by insertion into a region corresponding to that between the ydhe and pykF genes of E. coli. Virulence studies of VGC2 mutants have shown them to be attenuated by at least five orders of magnitude compared with the wild type strain following oral or intraperitoneal inoculation.
- 1. Carter, P. B. & Collins, F. M. (1974) J. Exp. Med. 139, 1189-1203.
- 2. Takeuchi, A. (1967) Am. J. Pathol. 50, 109-136.
- 3. Finlay, B. B. (1994) Curr. Top. Microbiol. Immunol. 192, 163-185.
- 4. Groisman, E. A. & Ochman, H. (1994) Trends Microbiol. 2, 289-293.
- 5. Hensel, M., Shea, J. E., Gleeson, C., Jones, M. D., Dalton, E. & Holden, D. W. (1995) Science 269, 400-403.
- 6. Salmond, G. P. C. & Reeves, P. J. (1993) Trends Biochem. Sci. 18, 7-12.
- 7. Van Gijsegem, F., Genin., S. & Boucher, C. (1993) Trends Microbiol. 1, 175-180.
- 8. Galan, J. E. & Curtiss, R. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 86, 6383-6387.
- 9. Groisman, E. A. & Ochman, H. (1993) EMBO J. 12, 3779-3787.
- 10. Ginocchio, C. C., Olmsted, S. B., Wells, C. L. & Galan, J. E. (1994) Cell 76, 717-724.
- 11. de Lorenzo, V. & Timmis, K. N. (1994) Methods Enzymol. 264, 386-405.
- 12. Davis, R. H., Botstein, D. & Roth, J. R. (1980) Advanced Bacterial Genetics, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.
- 13. Ausubel, F. M., Brent, R., Kingston, R. E., Moore, D. D., Seidman, J. G., Smith, J. A. and Struhl, K. (1987) Current Protocols in
Molecular Biology Vol 4 John Wiley and Sons, Inc, New York. - 14. Maurer, R., Osmond, B. C., Shekhtman, E., Wong, A. & Botstein, D. (1984) Genetics 108, 1-23.
- 15. Youderain, P., Sugiono, P.; Brewer, K. L., Higgins, N. P. & Elliott, T. (1988) Genetics 118, 581-592.
- 16. Benson, N. R. & Goldman, B. S. (1992) J. Bacteriol. 174, 1673-1681.
- 17. Holden, D. W., Kronstad, J. W. & Leong, S. (1989) EMBO J. 8, 1927-1934.
- 18. Sambrook, J., Fritsch, E. F. & Maniatis, T. (1989) Molecular cloning: a laboratory manual (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.).
- 19. Sanger, F., Nicklen, S. & Coulson, A. R. (1977) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 74, 5463-5467.
- 20. Devereux, J., Hearberli, P. & Smithies, O. (1984) Nucl. Acids Res. 12, 387-399.
- 21. Reed, L. J. & Muench, H. (1938) Am. J. Hyg. 27,493-497.
- 22. Sanderson, K. E., Hessel, A. & Rudd, K. E. (1995) Microbiol. Rev. 59, 241-303.
- 23. Galan, J. E., Ginocchio, C. & Costeas, P. (1992) J. Bacteriol. 174, 4338-4349.
- 24. Ginocchio, C., Pace, J. & Galan, J. E. (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 89, 5976-5980.
- 25. Eichelberg, K., Ginocchio, C. C. & Galan, J. E. (1994) J. Bacteriol. 176, 4501-4510.
- 26. Collazo, C. M., Zierler, M. K. & Galan, J. E. (1995) Mol. Microbiol. 15, 25-38.
- 27. Ohara, O., Dorit, R. L. & Gilbert, W. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86, 6883-6887.
- 28. Bachman, B. (1990) Micro. Rev. 54, 130-197.
- 29. Liu, S. L., Hessel, A. & Sanderson, K. E. (1993) J. Bacteriol. 175, 4104-4120.
- 30. Fasman, G. D. (1976) CRC Handbook of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology, CRC Press, Cleveland.
- 31. Bergman, T., Erickson, K., Galyov, E., Persson, C. & Wolf Watz, H. (1994) J. Bacteriol. 176, 2619-2626.
- 32. Andrews, G. P. & Maurelli, A. T. (1992) Infect. Immun. 60, 3287-3295.
- 33. Allaoui, A., Sansonetti, P. J. & Parsot, C. (1993) Mol. Microbiol. 7, 59-68.
- 34. Venkatesan, M., Buysse, J. M. & Oaks, E. V. (1992) J. Bacteriol. 174, 1990-2001.
- 35. Sasakawa, C., Komatsu, K., Tobe, T., Suzuki, T. & Yoshikawa, M. (1993) J. Bacteriol. 175, 2334-2346.
- 36. Plano, G. V., Barve, S. S. & Straley, S. C. (1991) J. Bacteriol. 173, 7293-7303.
- 37. Michiels, T., Vanooteghem, J. C., Lambert de Rouvroit, C., China, B., Gustin, A., Boudry, P. & Cornelis, G. R. (1991) J. Bacteriol. 173, 4994-5009.
- 38. Kaniga, K., Bossio, J. C. & Galan, J. E. (1994) Mol. Microbiol. 13, 555-568.
- 39. Ronson, C. W., Nixon, B. T. & Ausubel, F. M. (1987) Cell 49, 579-581.
- 40. Groisman, E. A., Sturmoski, M. A., Solomon, F. R., Lin, R. & Ochman, H. (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 90, 1033-1037.
- 41. Altmeyer, R. M., McNern, J. K., Bossio, J. C., Rosenshine, I., Finlay, B. B. & Galan, J. E. (1993) Mol. Microbiol. 7, 89-98.
- 42. Li, J., Ochman, H., Groisman, E. A., Boyd, E. F., Soloman, F., Nelson, K. & Selander, R. K. (1995) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 92, 7252-7256.
- 43. Finlay, B. B. & Rauschkowski, S. (1991) J. Cell Sci. 99, 283-296.
- 44. Francis, C. L., Stambach, M. N. & Falkow, S. (1992) Mol. Microbiol. 6, 3077-3087.
- In the absence of a convenient transposon system, the most efficient way of creating tagged mutants of Streptococcus pneumoniae is to use insertion-duplication mutagenesis (Morrison et al (1984) J. Bacteriol. 159, 870). Random S. pneumoniae DNA fragments of 200-400 bp will be generated by genomic DNA digestion with a restriction enzyme or by physical shearing by sonication followed by gel fractionation and DNA end-repair using T4 DNA polymerase. The fragments are ligated into plasmid pJDC9 (Pearce et al (1993) Mol. Microbiol. 9, 1037 which carries the erm gene for erythromycin selection in E. coli and S. pneumoniae), previously modified by incorporation of DNA sequence tags into one of the polylinker cloning sites. The size of cloned S. pneumoniae DNA is sufficient to ensure homologous recombination, and reduces the possibility of generating an unrepresentative library in E. coli (expression of S. pneumoniae proteins can be toxic to E. coli). Alternative vectors carrying different selectable markers are available and can be used in place of pJDC9. Tagged plasmids carrying DNA fragments are introduced to an appropriate S. pneumoniae strain selected on the basis of serotype and virulence in a murine model of pneumococcal pneumonia. Regulation of competence for genetic transformation in S. pneumoniae is governed by competence factor, a peptide of 17 amino acids which has been characterized recently by Don Morrison's group at the University of Illinois at Chicago and which is described Havarstein, Coomaraswamy and Morrison (1995) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 92, 11140-11144. Incorporation of minute quantities of this peptide in transformation experiments leads to very efficient transformation frequencies in some encapsulated clinical isolates of S. pneumoniae. This overcomes a major hurdle in pneumococcal molecular genetics and the availability of the peptide greatly facilitates the construction of S. pneumoniae mutant banks and allows flexibility in choosing the strain(s) to be mutated. A proportion of transformants are analysed to verify homologous integration of the plasmid sequences, and checked for stability. The very low level of reversion associated with mutants generated by insertion-duplication is minimized by the fact that the duplicated regions will be short (200-400 bp); however if the level of reversion is unacceptably high, antibiotic selection is maintained during growth of the transformants in culture and during growth in the animal.
- The S. pneumoniae mutant bank is organized into pools for inoculation into Swiss and/or C57B1/6 mice. Preliminary experiments are conducted to determine the optimum complexity of the pools and the optimum inoculum level. One attractive model utilises inocula of 105 cfu, delivered by mouth to the trachea (Veber et al (1993) J. Antimicrobial Chemotherapy 32, 473). Swiss mice develop acute pneumonia within 3-4 days, and C57B1/6 mice develop subacute pneumonia within 8-10 days. These pulmonary models of infection yield 108 cfu/lung (Veber et al (1993) J. Antimicrobial Chemotherapy 32, 473) at the time of death. If required, mice are also injected intraperitoneally for the identification of genes required for bloodstream infection (Sullivan et al (1993) Antimicrobial Agents and
Chemotherapy 37, 234). - Once the parameters of the infection model are optimized, a mutant bank consisting of several thousand strains is subjected to virulence tests. Mutants with attenuated virulence are identified by hybridisation analysis, using labelled tags from the ‘input’ and ‘recovered’ pools as probes. If S. pneumoniae DNA cannot be colony blotted easily, chromosomal DNA is liberated chemically or enzymatically in the wells of microtitre dishes prior to transfer onto nylon membranes using a dot-blot apparatus. DNA flanking the integrated plasmid is cloned by plasmid rescue in E. coli (Morrison et al (1984) J. Bacteriol. 159, 870), and sequenced. Genomic DNA libraries are constructed in appropriate vectors maintained in either E. coli or a Gram-positive host strain, and are probed with restriction fragments flanking the integrated plasmid to isolate cloned virulence genes which is then fully sequenced and subjected to detailed functional analysis.
- Mutagenesis of E. faecalis is accomplished using plasmid pAT112 or a derivative, developed for this purpose. pAT112 carries genes for selection in both Gram-negative and Gram-positive bacteria, and the att site of Tn1545. It therefore requires the presence in the host strain of the integrase for transposition, and stable, single copy insertions are obtained if the host does not contain an excisionase gene (Trieu-Cuot et al (1991) Gene 106, 21). Recovery of DNA flanking the integrated plasmid is accomplished by restriction digestion of genomic DNA, intramolecular ligation and transformation of E. coli. The presence of single sites for restriction enzymes in pAT112 and its derivatives will (Trieu-Cuot et al (1991) Gene 106, 21) allows the incorporation of DNA sequence tags prior to transfer to a virulent strain of E. faecalis carrying plasmid pAT145 (to provide the integrase function) by either conjugation, electroporation or transformation (Trieu-Cuot et al (1991) Gene 106, 21; Wirth et al (1986) J. Bacteriol. 165, 831).
- A large number of insertion mutants are analysed for random integration of the plasmid by isolating DNA from transcipients, restriction enzyme digestion and Southern hybridisation. Individual mutants are stored in the wells of microtitre dishes, and complexity and size of pooled inocula are optimised prior to screening of the mutant bank. Two different models of infection caused by E. faecalis are employed. The first is a well established rat model of endocarditis, involving tail vein injection of up to 108 cfu of E. faecalis into animals that have a catheter inserted across the aortic valve (Whitman et al (1993) Antimicrobial Agents and
Chemotherapy 37, 1069). Animals are sacrificed at various times after inoculation, and bacterial vegetations on the aortic valve are excised, homogenized and plated to culture medium to recover bacterial colonies. Virulent bacteria are also recovered from the blood at various times after inoculation. The second model is of peritonitis in mice, following intraperitoneal injection of up to 109 cfu of E. faecalis (Chenoweth et al (1990) Antimicrobial Agents and Chemotherapy 34, 1800). As with the S. pneumoniae model, preliminary experiments are done to establish the optimum complexity of the pools and the optimum inoculum level, prior to screening the mutant bank. - (c) Virulence Gene Identification
- Isolation of DNA flanking the site of integration of pAT112 using its E. coli origin of replication is simplified by the lack of sites for most of the commonly used 6 bp recognition restriction enzymes in the vector. Therefore DNA from the strains of interest are digested with one of these enzymes, self-ligated, transformed into E. coli and sequenced using primers based on the sequences adjacent to the att sites on the plasmid. A genomic DNA library of E. faecalis are probed with sequences of interest to identify intact copies of virulence genes which are then sequenced.
- Since transposon Tn5 has been used by others to mutagenise Pseudomonas aeruginosa, and the mini-Tn5 derivative that was used for the identification of Salmonella typhimurium virulence genes (Example 1) is reported to have broad utilisation among Gram-negative bacteria, including several pseudomonads (DeLorenzo and Timaris (1994) Methods Enymol. 264, 386), a P. aeruginosa mutant bank is constructed using our existing pool of signature tagged mini-Tn5 transposons by conjugal transfer of the suicide vector to one or more virulent (and possibly mucoid) recipient strains. This approach represents a significant time saving. Other derivatives of Tn5 designed specifically for P. aeruginosa mutagenesis (Rella et al (1985) Gene 33, 293), may alternatively be employed with the mini Tn5 transposon.
- The bank of P. aeruginosa insertion mutants is screened for attenuated virulence in a chronic pulmonary infection model in rats. Suspensions of P. aeruginosa cells are introduced into a bronchus following tracheotomy, and disease develops over a 30 day period (Woods et al (1982) Infect. Immun. 36, 1223). Bacteria are recovered by plating lung homogenates to laboratory medium and sequence tags from these are used to probe DNA colony blots of bacteria used as the inoculum. It is also possible to subject the mutant bank to virulence tests in a model of endogenous bacteremia (Hirakata et al (1992) Antimicrobial Agents and Chemotherapy 36, 1198), and cystic fibrosis (Davidson et al (1995)
Nature Genetics 9, 351) in mice. Cloning and sequencing of DNA flanking the transposons is done as described in Example 1. Genomic DNA libraries for the isolation and sequencing of intact copies of the genes are constructed in the laboratory by standard methods. - The functional eqiuvalent of transposon mutagenesis in fungi is restriction enzyme mediated integration (REMI) of transforming DNA (Schiestl and Petes (1991) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 88, 7585). In this process, fungal cells are transformed with DNA fragments carrying a selectable marker in the presence of a restriction enzyme, and single copy integrations occur at different genomic sites, defined by the target sequence of the restriction enzyme. REMI has already been used successfully to isolate virulence genes of Cochliobolus (Lu et al (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91, 12649) and Ustilago (Bolker et al (1995) Mol. Gen. Genet. 248, 547), and have shown that incorporation of active restriction enzyme with a plasmid encoding hygromycin resistance leads to single and apparently random integration of the linear plasmid into the A. fumigatus genome. Sequence tags are introduced into a convenient site in one of two vectors for hygromycin resistance, and used to transform a clinical isolate of A. fumigatus.
- The low-dose model of aspergillosis in neutropenic mice in particular closely matches the course of pulmonary disease in humans (Smith et al (1994) Infect. Immun. 62, 5247). Mice are inoculated intranasally with up to 1,000,000 conidiospores/mouse, and virulent fungal mutants are recovered 7-10 days later by using lung homogenates to inoculate liquid medium. Hyphae are collected after a few hours, from which DNA is extracted for amplification and labelling of tags to probe colony blots of DNA from the pool of transformants comprising the inoculum. DNA from the regions flanking the REMI insertion points are cloned by digesting the transformant DNA with a restriction enzyme that cuts outside the REMI vector, self ligation and transformation of E. coli. Primers based on the known sequence of the plasmid are used to determine the adjacent A. fumigatus DNA sequences. To prove that the insertion of the vector was the cause of the avirulent phenotype, the recovered plasmid is recut with the same restriction enzyme used for cloning, and transformed back into the wild-type A. fumigatus parent strain. Transformants that have arisen by homologous recombination are then subjected to virulence tests.
- Ausubel, F. M., Brent, R., Kingston, R. E., Moore, D. D., Seidman, J. G., Smith, J. A. and Struhl, K. (1987) Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, New York: John Wiley and Sons.
- Buchmeier, N. A., Lipps, C. J., So, M. Y. and Heffron, F. (1993) Recombination-deficient mutants of Salmonella typhimurium are avirulent and sensitive to the oxidative burst of macrophages. Mol. Microbiol. 7, 933-936.
- Carter, P. B. and Collins, F. M. (1974) The route of enteric infection in normal mice. J. Exp. Med. 139, 1189-1203.
- de Lorenzo, V. and Timmis, K. N. (1994) Analysis and construction of stable phenotypes in Gram-negative bacteria with Tn5-and Tn10-derived minitransposons. Methods Enzymol. 264, 386-405.
- de Lorenzo, V., Herrero, M., Jakubzik, U. and Timmis, K. N. (1990) Mini-Tn5 transposon derivatives for insertion mutagenesis, promoter probing, and chromosomal insertion of cloned DNA in gram-negative eubacteria. J. Bacteriol. 172, 6568-6572.
- Fields, P. I., Groisman, E. A. and Heffron, F. (1989) A Salmonella locus that controls resistance to microbicidal proteins from phagocytic cells. Science 243, 1059-1062.
- Finlay, B. B., Starnbach, M. N., Francis, C. L., Stocker, B. A., Chatfield, S., Dougan, G. and Falkow, S. (1988) Identification and characterization of TnphoA mutants of Salmonella that are unable to pass through a polarized MDCK epithelial cell monolayer. Mol. Microbiol. 2, 757-766.
- Groisman, E. A., Chiao, E., Lipps, C. J., Heffron, F. (1989) Salmonella typhimurium phoP virulence gene is a transcriptional regulator. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 86, 7077-7081.
- Groisman, E. A. and Ochman, H. (1994) How to become a pathogen. Trends Microbiol. 2, 289-293.
- Groisman, E. A. and Saier, M. H., Jr. (1990) Salmonella virulence: new clues to intramacrophage survival. Trends Biochem. Sci. 15, 30-33.
- Herrero, M., de Lorenzo, V. and Timmis, K. N. (1990) Transposon vectors containing non-antibiotic resistance selection markers for cloning and stable chromosomal insertion of foreign genes in Gram-negative bacteria. J. Bacteriol. 172, 6557-6567.
- Holden D. W., Kronstad J. W., Leong S. A. (1989) Mutation in a heat-regulated hsp70 gene of Ustilago maydis. EMBO J. 8, 1927-1934.
- Holland J., Towner K. J., Williams P. (1992) Tn916 insertion mutagenesis in Escherichia coli and Haemophilus influenzae type b following conjugative transfer. J. Gen. Microbiol. 138, 509-515.
- Mahan, M. J., Slauch, J. M., Mekalanos, J. J. (1993) Selection of bacterial virulence genes that are specifically induced in host tissues. Science 259, 686-688.
- Miller, S. I., Kukral, A. M. and Mekalanos, J. J. (1989a) A two-component regulatory system (phoP phoQ) controls Salmonella typhimurium virulence. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 86, 5054-5058.
- Miller, I., Maskell, D., Hormaeche, C., Johnson, K., Pickard, D. and Dougan, G. (1989b) Isolation of orally attenuated Salmonella typhimurium following TnphoA mutagenesis. Infect. Immun. 57, 2758-2763.
- Miller, V. L. and Mekalanos, J. J. (1988) A novel suicide vector and its use in construction of invertion mutations: osmoregulation of outer membrane proteins and virulence determinants in Vibrio cholerae requires toxR. J. Bacteriol. 170, 2575-2583.
- Sambrook, J., Fritsch, E. F. and Maniatis, T. (1989) Molecular cloning: a laboratory manual, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.: Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory.
- Sanger, F., Nicklen, S. and Coulson, A. R. (1977) DNA sequencing with chain terminating inhibitors. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 74, 5463-5467.
- Schiestl R. H., and Petes T. D. (1991) Integration of DNA fragments by illegitimate recombination in Saccharomyces cerevisiae. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA. 88, 7585-7589.
Claims (57)
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US11/199,853 US20060216309A1 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 2005-08-09 | Identification of genes |
US12/890,892 US20110229515A1 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 2010-09-27 | Identification of genes |
Applications Claiming Priority (11)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
GBGB9424921.6A GB9424921D0 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 1994-12-09 | Identification of genes |
GB9424921.6 | 1994-12-09 | ||
GB9501881.8 | 1995-01-31 | ||
GBGB9501881.8A GB9501881D0 (en) | 1995-01-31 | 1995-01-31 | Identification of genes |
GBGB9509239.1A GB9509239D0 (en) | 1995-05-05 | 1995-05-05 | Identification of genes |
GB9509239.1 | 1995-05-05 | ||
US08/637,759 US5876931A (en) | 1994-12-09 | 1995-12-11 | Identification of genes |
PCT/GB1995/002875 WO1996017951A2 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 1995-12-11 | Identification of genes responsible for in vivo survival of microorganisms |
US09/201,945 US6342215B1 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 1998-12-01 | Identification of genes |
US09/714,602 US6984490B1 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 2000-11-16 | Identification of genes |
US11/199,853 US20060216309A1 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 2005-08-09 | Identification of genes |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US09/714,602 Division US6984490B1 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 2000-11-16 | Identification of genes |
Related Child Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US11/840,903 Continuation US7842290B2 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 2007-08-17 | Identification of genes |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20060216309A1 true US20060216309A1 (en) | 2006-09-28 |
Family
ID=27267507
Family Applications (7)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US08/637,759 Expired - Lifetime US5876931A (en) | 1994-12-09 | 1995-12-11 | Identification of genes |
US08/871,355 Expired - Lifetime US6015669A (en) | 1994-12-09 | 1997-06-09 | Identification of genes |
US09/201,945 Expired - Fee Related US6342215B1 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 1998-12-01 | Identification of genes |
US09/714,602 Expired - Fee Related US6984490B1 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 2000-11-16 | Identification of genes |
US11/199,853 Abandoned US20060216309A1 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 2005-08-09 | Identification of genes |
US11/840,903 Expired - Fee Related US7842290B2 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 2007-08-17 | Identification of genes |
US12/890,892 Abandoned US20110229515A1 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 2010-09-27 | Identification of genes |
Family Applications Before (4)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US08/637,759 Expired - Lifetime US5876931A (en) | 1994-12-09 | 1995-12-11 | Identification of genes |
US08/871,355 Expired - Lifetime US6015669A (en) | 1994-12-09 | 1997-06-09 | Identification of genes |
US09/201,945 Expired - Fee Related US6342215B1 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 1998-12-01 | Identification of genes |
US09/714,602 Expired - Fee Related US6984490B1 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 2000-11-16 | Identification of genes |
Family Applications After (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US11/840,903 Expired - Fee Related US7842290B2 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 2007-08-17 | Identification of genes |
US12/890,892 Abandoned US20110229515A1 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 2010-09-27 | Identification of genes |
Country Status (21)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (7) | US5876931A (en) |
EP (3) | EP0889120B1 (en) |
JP (3) | JP3522285B2 (en) |
KR (4) | KR20060099543A (en) |
CN (3) | CN1912141B (en) |
AT (2) | ATE215986T1 (en) |
AU (1) | AU711524C (en) |
CA (2) | CA2206515C (en) |
CZ (1) | CZ296981B6 (en) |
DE (3) | DE69526377T2 (en) |
DK (2) | DK0889120T3 (en) |
ES (2) | ES2126332T3 (en) |
FI (1) | FI121601B (en) |
HK (2) | HK1009833A1 (en) |
HU (1) | HUT76975A (en) |
NO (2) | NO320492B1 (en) |
NZ (3) | NZ296581A (en) |
PT (1) | PT889120E (en) |
RU (1) | RU2370541C2 (en) |
SG (4) | SG56084A1 (en) |
WO (1) | WO1996017951A2 (en) |
Cited By (12)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20040203039A1 (en) * | 1998-09-04 | 2004-10-14 | Microscience Limited | Attenuated salmonella SP12 mutants as antigen carriers |
US20080175866A1 (en) * | 1994-12-09 | 2008-07-24 | Imperial College Innovations Limited | Identification of Genes |
US20080274139A1 (en) * | 1999-05-10 | 2008-11-06 | Robert Graham Feldman | Attenuated microorganisms for the treatment of infection |
US20120208724A1 (en) * | 2011-02-10 | 2012-08-16 | Steemers Frank J | Linking sequence reads using paired code tags |
US8703153B2 (en) | 2008-06-16 | 2014-04-22 | Prokarium Ltd. | Salmonella vectored vaccines against Chlamydia and methods of use |
US8829171B2 (en) | 2011-02-10 | 2014-09-09 | Illumina, Inc. | Linking sequence reads using paired code tags |
US9683230B2 (en) | 2013-01-09 | 2017-06-20 | Illumina Cambridge Limited | Sample preparation on a solid support |
US10246746B2 (en) | 2013-12-20 | 2019-04-02 | Illumina, Inc. | Preserving genomic connectivity information in fragmented genomic DNA samples |
US10457936B2 (en) | 2011-02-02 | 2019-10-29 | University Of Washington Through Its Center For Commercialization | Massively parallel contiguity mapping |
US10557133B2 (en) | 2013-03-13 | 2020-02-11 | Illumina, Inc. | Methods and compositions for nucleic acid sequencing |
US10577601B2 (en) | 2008-09-12 | 2020-03-03 | University Of Washington | Error detection in sequence tag directed subassemblies of short sequencing reads |
US11873480B2 (en) | 2014-10-17 | 2024-01-16 | Illumina Cambridge Limited | Contiguity preserving transposition |
Families Citing this family (84)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2001504321A (en) * | 1996-06-17 | 2001-04-03 | マイクロサイド・ファーマシューティカルズ・インコーポレーテッド | Screening method using microbial strain pool |
US6455323B1 (en) | 1997-07-03 | 2002-09-24 | Pharmacia & Upjohn Company | Anti-bacterial methods and materials |
NO974299D0 (en) * | 1997-09-18 | 1997-09-18 | Forskningsparken I Aas As | Method for stable labeling of microorganisms |
AU2144499A (en) * | 1998-01-22 | 1999-08-09 | Vrije Universiteit Brussel | Live attenuated salmonella vaccine |
EP0943681A1 (en) * | 1998-01-22 | 1999-09-22 | Vrije Universiteit Brussel | Live attenuated salmonella vaccine |
AU3243199A (en) * | 1998-03-05 | 1999-09-20 | University Of British Columbia, The | Methods for assaying type iii secretion inhibitors |
WO1999047643A1 (en) * | 1998-03-18 | 1999-09-23 | Quark Biotech, Inc. | Selection subtraction approach to gene identification |
WO1999059630A1 (en) * | 1998-05-15 | 1999-11-25 | University Of California Los Angeles | Type iii bordetella secretion system |
AU6504399A (en) * | 1998-09-30 | 2000-04-17 | Boston Medical Center Corporation | Identification of virulence determinant activators in prokaryotic pathogens government support |
US6720139B1 (en) | 1999-01-27 | 2004-04-13 | Elitra Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Genes identified as required for proliferation in Escherichia coli |
US6299850B1 (en) | 1999-03-16 | 2001-10-09 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Energy | Carbon activation process for increased surface accessibility in electrochemical capacitors |
ES2535961T3 (en) * | 1999-04-09 | 2015-05-19 | Zoetis P&U Llc | Attenuated pasteurellaceae bacterium that has a mutation in a virulence gene |
US6790950B2 (en) | 1999-04-09 | 2004-09-14 | Pharmacia & Upjohn Company | Anti-bacterial vaccine compositions |
AU5559300A (en) * | 1999-07-06 | 2001-01-22 | Institut Pasteur | Method of making and identifying attenuated microorganisms, compositions utilizing the sequences responsible for attenuation, and preparations containing attenuated microorganisms |
US6589738B1 (en) | 1999-11-09 | 2003-07-08 | Elitra Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Genes essential for microbial proliferation and antisense thereto |
EP1252180A2 (en) * | 2000-02-03 | 2002-10-30 | Microscience Limited | Virulence genes, proteins, and their use |
US6783985B1 (en) | 2000-02-18 | 2004-08-31 | Elitra Pharmaceuticals Inc. | Gene disruption methodologies for drug target discovery |
JP2003527433A (en) * | 2000-03-17 | 2003-09-16 | ファルマシア・アンド・アップジョン・カンパニー | Salmonella vaccine materials and methods |
GB0008748D0 (en) * | 2000-04-11 | 2000-05-31 | Univ Manchester | Mutant bank |
GB0011108D0 (en) * | 2000-05-08 | 2000-06-28 | Microscience Ltd | Virulence gene and protein and their use |
US20020076722A1 (en) * | 2000-09-13 | 2002-06-20 | Neyfakh Alexander A. | Antibiotic hypersusceptibility mutations in bacteria |
US20020094536A1 (en) * | 2000-12-28 | 2002-07-18 | Cell Therapeutics, Inc. | Methods for making polynucleotide libraries, polynucleotide arrays, and cell libraries for high-throughput genomics analysis |
US20030180953A1 (en) * | 2000-12-29 | 2003-09-25 | Elitra Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Gene disruption methodologies for drug target discovery |
CA2445179A1 (en) * | 2001-04-23 | 2002-10-31 | Elitra Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Identification of essential genes of aspegillus fumigatus and methods of use |
US20040152099A1 (en) * | 2001-05-17 | 2004-08-05 | Elke Freissler | Screening method for attenuating or virulence defective microbial cells |
WO2002103513A1 (en) * | 2001-06-15 | 2002-12-27 | Chiron Corporation | Essential and important genes of pseudomonas aeruginosa and the use thereof to design or identify antibacterial agents |
JP2005504523A (en) | 2001-06-22 | 2005-02-17 | ヘルス プロテクション エージェンシー | Mycobacterial antigen expressed under hypoxic pressure |
JP2005508613A (en) | 2001-07-04 | 2005-04-07 | ヘルス プロテクション エージェンシー | Mycobacterial antigens expressed during incubation |
WO2003008631A2 (en) * | 2001-07-20 | 2003-01-30 | Health Protection Agency | Tagging of microorganisms |
US7026123B1 (en) * | 2001-08-29 | 2006-04-11 | Pioneer Hi-Bred International, Inc. | UTR tag assay for gene function discovery |
GB0125535D0 (en) | 2001-10-24 | 2001-12-12 | Microbiological Res Authority | Mycobacterial genes down-regulated during latency |
US20040029129A1 (en) * | 2001-10-25 | 2004-02-12 | Liangsu Wang | Identification of essential genes in microorganisms |
JP2005519872A (en) * | 2001-11-12 | 2005-07-07 | ファルマシア アンド アップジョン カンパニー リミティド ライアビリティー カンパニー | Salmonella vaccine |
US20030170694A1 (en) * | 2001-12-21 | 2003-09-11 | Daniel Wall | Stabilized nucleic acids in gene and drug discovery and methods of use |
US7449178B2 (en) | 2002-04-05 | 2008-11-11 | Merial Limited | Attenuated gram negative bacteria |
PT1350796E (en) * | 2002-04-05 | 2009-01-23 | Merial Sas | Attenuated gram negative bacteria |
EP1499732A4 (en) * | 2002-04-15 | 2005-11-16 | Chiron Corp | Essential and important genes of pseudomonas aeroginosa and the use thereof to design or identify antibacterial agents |
US8173363B2 (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2012-05-08 | Novartis Vaccines And Diagnostics, Inc. | Random transposon insertion in Staphylococcus aureus and use thereof to identify essential genes |
FI116068B (en) * | 2003-09-15 | 2005-09-15 | Fit Biotech Oyj Plc | New selection system, useful vector, bacterial strains and cell selection method |
US20070224341A1 (en) * | 2003-11-21 | 2007-09-27 | Matthias Kuntz | Method for the Modification of Chiral Liquid-Crystal Films with the Aid of Extractants |
US20050266447A1 (en) * | 2004-04-19 | 2005-12-01 | Pioneer Hi-Bred International, Inc. | Method for identifying activators of gene transcription |
WO2006085899A2 (en) | 2004-05-21 | 2006-08-17 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Method for enhancing production of isoprenoid compounds |
SG176459A1 (en) | 2005-07-05 | 2011-12-29 | Univ California | Polynucleotides encoding isoprenoid modifying enzymes and methods of use thereof |
EP1752532A1 (en) | 2005-08-09 | 2007-02-14 | Helmholtz-Zentrum für Infektionsforschung GmbH | Extracellular polyhydroxyalkanoates produced by genetically engineered microorganisms |
SG172646A1 (en) | 2006-05-26 | 2011-07-28 | Amyris Biotechnologies Inc | Production of isoprenoids |
US20080124355A1 (en) | 2006-09-22 | 2008-05-29 | David Gordon Bermudes | Live bacterial vaccines for viral infection prophylaxis or treatment |
BRPI0716954B1 (en) | 2006-09-26 | 2024-04-30 | The Regents Of The University Of California | GENETICALLY MODIFIED MICROORGANISMS CAPABLE OF PRODUCING AN ISOPRENOID |
US20110027321A1 (en) * | 2007-05-25 | 2011-02-03 | Emergent Product Development Gaithersburg Inc. | Chlamydia Vaccine Comprising HtrA Polypeptides |
US9051665B2 (en) * | 2008-11-20 | 2015-06-09 | Steven L. Zeichner | Method for screening biomolecules |
US10369772B2 (en) | 2012-07-10 | 2019-08-06 | Textron Innovations Inc. | Method of making core-stiffened structure |
WO2011123567A1 (en) | 2010-03-31 | 2011-10-06 | Codexis, Inc. | Production of geranyl diphosphate |
MX2012013037A (en) | 2010-05-10 | 2013-07-29 | Univ California | Endoribonuclease compositions and methods of use thereof. |
US8481052B2 (en) * | 2011-05-17 | 2013-07-09 | Cj Cheiljedang Corporation | Avirulent Salmonella gallinarum variants and pharmaceutical composition using the same |
EP3524676A1 (en) | 2011-12-16 | 2019-08-14 | The Board of Trustees of The Leland Stanford Junior University | Opsin polypeptides and methods of use thereof |
IN2015DN00552A (en) | 2012-07-19 | 2015-06-26 | Redwood Bioscience Inc | |
RS60080B1 (en) | 2012-08-16 | 2020-05-29 | Ipierian Inc | Methods of treating a tauopathy |
AU2013334229B2 (en) | 2012-10-25 | 2018-02-15 | Bioverativ Usa Inc. | Anti-complement C1s antibodies and uses thereof |
EP2914291B1 (en) | 2012-11-02 | 2022-02-23 | Bioverativ USA Inc. | Anti-complement c1s antibodies and uses thereof |
KR20210147101A (en) | 2013-02-15 | 2021-12-06 | 더 리젠츠 오브 더 유니버시티 오브 캘리포니아 | Chimeric Antigen Receptor and Methods of Use Thereof |
WO2014161988A1 (en) | 2013-04-05 | 2014-10-09 | Université Du Luxembourg | Biotechnological production of itaconic acid |
PL3007726T3 (en) | 2013-06-10 | 2021-01-11 | Ipierian, Inc. | Methods of treating a tauopathy |
US9616114B1 (en) | 2014-09-18 | 2017-04-11 | David Gordon Bermudes | Modified bacteria having improved pharmacokinetics and tumor colonization enhancing antitumor activity |
IL254670B2 (en) | 2015-04-06 | 2023-04-01 | Bioverativ Usa Inc | Humanized anti-c1s antibodies and methods of use thereof |
MX2018002610A (en) | 2015-09-02 | 2018-09-27 | Immutep Sas | Anti-LAG-3 Antibodies. |
US11325948B2 (en) | 2016-03-19 | 2022-05-10 | Exuma Biotech Corp. | Methods and compositions for genetically modifying lymphocytes to express polypeptides comprising the intracellular domain of MPL |
WO2020047527A2 (en) | 2018-09-02 | 2020-03-05 | F1 Bioventures, Llc | Methods and compositions for genetically modifying lymphocytes in blood or in enriched pbmcs |
US11111505B2 (en) | 2016-03-19 | 2021-09-07 | Exuma Biotech, Corp. | Methods and compositions for transducing lymphocytes and regulating the activity thereof |
EP3430136A2 (en) | 2016-03-19 | 2019-01-23 | F1 Oncology, Inc. | Methods and compositions for transducing lymphocytes and regulated expansion thereof |
SG11201808525UA (en) | 2016-04-04 | 2018-10-30 | Bioverativ Usa Inc | Anti-complement factor bb antibodies and uses thereof |
EP3472318B1 (en) | 2016-07-08 | 2023-09-06 | Exuma Biotech Corp. | Methods and compositions for transducing lymphocytes and regulating the activity thereof |
KR102397683B1 (en) * | 2016-07-13 | 2022-05-13 | 소마젠 인크 | Methods and systems for microbial pharmacogenomics |
SG11201903012RA (en) | 2016-10-12 | 2019-05-30 | Bioverativ Usa Inc | Anti-c1s antibodies and methods of use thereof |
US11180535B1 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2021-11-23 | David Gordon Bermudes | Saccharide binding, tumor penetration, and cytotoxic antitumor chimeric peptides from therapeutic bacteria |
US11129906B1 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2021-09-28 | David Gordon Bermudes | Chimeric protein toxins for expression by therapeutic bacteria |
CA3049674A1 (en) | 2017-01-18 | 2018-07-26 | F1 Oncology, Inc. | Chimeric antigen receptors against axl or ror2 and methods of use thereof |
EP3589733A1 (en) | 2017-03-03 | 2020-01-08 | F1 Oncology, Inc. | Methods and compositions for transducing and expanding lymphocytes and regulating the activity thereof |
EP3615667B1 (en) | 2017-04-27 | 2021-08-11 | The Regents of The University of California | Microorganisms and methods for producing cannabinoids and cannabinoid derivatives |
CN111527105B (en) | 2017-10-11 | 2024-10-25 | 美国比奥维拉迪维股份有限公司 | Methods of inducing complement activity |
US11541105B2 (en) | 2018-06-01 | 2023-01-03 | The Research Foundation For The State University Of New York | Compositions and methods for disrupting biofilm formation and maintenance |
US11471497B1 (en) | 2019-03-13 | 2022-10-18 | David Gordon Bermudes | Copper chelation therapeutics |
US10973908B1 (en) | 2020-05-14 | 2021-04-13 | David Gordon Bermudes | Expression of SARS-CoV-2 spike protein receptor binding domain in attenuated salmonella as a vaccine |
WO2022187289A1 (en) | 2021-03-01 | 2022-09-09 | Exuma Biotech Corp. | Methods and compositions for the delivery of retroviral particles |
EP4433512A2 (en) | 2021-11-19 | 2024-09-25 | The Trustees of The University of Pennsylvania | Engineered pan-leukocyte antigen cd45 to facilitate car t cell therapy |
WO2023168305A1 (en) | 2022-03-01 | 2023-09-07 | Exuma Biotech Corp. | Viral particles with membrane-bound hyaluronidase |
Citations (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4550081A (en) * | 1980-05-19 | 1985-10-29 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Jr. University | Non-reverting salmonella |
US4837151A (en) * | 1980-05-19 | 1989-06-06 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University, Stanford University | Live vaccines comprising two mutations and foreign antigen |
US5397697A (en) * | 1989-01-10 | 1995-03-14 | Ciba-Geigy Corporation | Identification of plant-responsive genes of bacteria |
US5527674A (en) * | 1991-10-07 | 1996-06-18 | Idaho Research Foundation, Inc. | Genetic construct for selection of homologous recombinants on a single selective medium |
US5700928A (en) * | 1995-10-16 | 1997-12-23 | Smithkline Beecham, P.L.C. | Polynucleotide encoding saliva binding protein |
US5700683A (en) * | 1995-02-17 | 1997-12-23 | Pathogenesis Corporation | Virulence-attenuating genetic deletions deleted from mycobacterium BCG |
US5876931A (en) * | 1994-12-09 | 1999-03-02 | Rpms Technology Limited | Identification of genes |
Family Cites Families (37)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4440859A (en) * | 1977-05-27 | 1984-04-03 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Method for producing recombinant bacterial plasmids containing the coding sequences of higher organisms |
US4704362A (en) * | 1977-11-08 | 1987-11-03 | Genentech, Inc. | Recombinant cloning vehicle microbial polypeptide expression |
IL59007A (en) * | 1978-12-22 | 1983-11-30 | Biogen Nv | Recombinant dna molecules coding for polypeptides displaying hepatitis b virus antigenicity,method of their production and compositions containing the same |
US4530901A (en) * | 1980-01-08 | 1985-07-23 | Biogen N.V. | Recombinant DNA molecules and their use in producing human interferon-like polypeptides |
US5210035A (en) * | 1980-05-19 | 1993-05-11 | Board Of Trustees Of Leland Stanford Jr. University | Non-reventing live vaccines |
US4766075A (en) * | 1982-07-14 | 1988-08-23 | Genentech, Inc. | Human tissue plasminogen activator |
US4582800A (en) * | 1982-07-12 | 1986-04-15 | Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. | Novel vectors and method for controlling interferon expression |
US4757006A (en) * | 1983-10-28 | 1988-07-12 | Genetics Institute, Inc. | Human factor VIII:C gene and recombinant methods for production |
US4677063A (en) * | 1985-05-02 | 1987-06-30 | Cetus Corporation | Human tumor necrosis factor |
US5643579A (en) * | 1984-11-01 | 1997-07-01 | American Home Products Corporation | Oral vaccines |
US4810648A (en) * | 1986-01-08 | 1989-03-07 | Rhone Poulenc Agrochimie | Haloarylnitrile degrading gene, its use, and cells containing the gene |
FR2664614B1 (en) * | 1990-07-11 | 1992-10-16 | Pasteur Institut | NUCLEIC SEQUENCES FROM THE GENOME OF SALMONELLA TYPHI, AND THEIR USES IN PARTICULAR FOR THE IN VITRO DIAGNOSIS OF THE PRESENCE OF BACTERIA OF THE GENUS SALMONELLA IN FOOD PRODUCTS. |
SE9101433D0 (en) | 1991-05-13 | 1991-05-13 | Marianne Hansson | RECOMBINANT DNA SEQUENCE AND ITS USE |
AU2509592A (en) * | 1991-08-22 | 1993-03-16 | Washington University | Polynucleotide probes for salmonella |
CA2123675A1 (en) | 1991-11-15 | 1993-05-27 | David W. Niesel | Membrane expression of heterologous genes |
US5356797A (en) * | 1991-11-15 | 1994-10-18 | Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas | Membrane expression of heterologous genes |
JPH08503136A (en) | 1992-11-06 | 1996-04-09 | リージェンツ・オブ・ザ・ユニバーシティ・オブ・ミネソタ | P. Infection protective agent against pasteurellosis caused by MULTOCIDA |
WO1994026933A1 (en) * | 1993-05-13 | 1994-11-24 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University | Genetic footprinting: insertional mutagenesis and genetic selection |
US5700638A (en) | 1993-08-26 | 1997-12-23 | Washington University | Cell death regulator |
DE4405652A1 (en) * | 1994-02-22 | 1995-09-07 | Hoechst Ag | Process for the production of non-oxide ceramics with a defined thermal conductivity |
WO1996011708A1 (en) | 1994-10-18 | 1996-04-25 | Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System | Membrane expression of heterologous genes |
WO1997018225A1 (en) | 1995-11-14 | 1997-05-22 | The General Hospital Corporation | Salmonella secreted proteins and uses thereof |
WO1998006428A1 (en) | 1996-08-16 | 1998-02-19 | The Uab Research Foundation | Mucosal immunogens for novel vaccines |
GB9621091D0 (en) * | 1996-10-09 | 1996-11-27 | Fondation Pour Le Perfectionem | Attenuated microorganisms strains and their uses |
WO1998035562A1 (en) | 1997-02-14 | 1998-08-20 | Merck & Co., Inc. | Polynucleotide vaccine formulations |
US6455323B1 (en) | 1997-07-03 | 2002-09-24 | Pharmacia & Upjohn Company | Anti-bacterial methods and materials |
GB9804809D0 (en) | 1998-03-06 | 1998-04-29 | Wallis Timothy S | Attenuated salmonella:materials and methods relating thereto |
US6585975B1 (en) * | 1998-04-30 | 2003-07-01 | Acambis, Inc. | Use of Salmonella vectors for vaccination against helicobacter infection |
CA2341349C (en) * | 1998-09-04 | 2013-12-10 | Creatogen Aktiengesellschaft | Attenuated cells comprising sp12 mutants, carriers and compositions containing same, methods of production and uses thereof |
KR20010099789A (en) * | 1998-11-09 | 2001-11-09 | 추후제출 | Virulence Genes And Proteins, And Their Use |
GB9910812D0 (en) * | 1999-05-10 | 1999-07-07 | Microscience Ltd | Vaccine composition |
WO2001032697A2 (en) | 1999-11-05 | 2001-05-10 | L'unite De Recherche En Biologie Moleculaire (Urbm) Des Facultes Universitaires Notre Dame De La Paix (Fundp) | Virulence genes and proteins from brucella melitensis, and their use |
JP2003520034A (en) * | 1999-12-23 | 2003-07-02 | ヴィマックス リミテッド | Virulence genes, proteins, and their uses |
GB0011108D0 (en) | 2000-05-08 | 2000-06-28 | Microscience Ltd | Virulence gene and protein and their use |
US6548368B1 (en) * | 2000-08-23 | 2003-04-15 | Applied Materials, Inc. | Method of forming a MIS capacitor |
GB0127657D0 (en) | 2001-11-19 | 2002-01-09 | Microscience Ltd | Virulence genes and proteins and their use |
US7449178B2 (en) * | 2002-04-05 | 2008-11-11 | Merial Limited | Attenuated gram negative bacteria |
-
1995
- 1995-12-11 WO PCT/GB1995/002875 patent/WO1996017951A2/en active IP Right Grant
- 1995-12-11 ES ES95939362T patent/ES2126332T3/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1995-12-11 CA CA002206515A patent/CA2206515C/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1995-12-11 CZ CZ0175597A patent/CZ296981B6/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1995-12-11 AT AT98201907T patent/ATE215986T1/en active
- 1995-12-11 DE DE69526377T patent/DE69526377T2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1995-12-11 ES ES98201907T patent/ES2178101T3/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1995-12-11 JP JP51742896A patent/JP3522285B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1995-12-11 US US08/637,759 patent/US5876931A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1995-12-11 SG SG9801353A patent/SG56084A1/en unknown
- 1995-12-11 SG SG2006070270A patent/SG173213A1/en unknown
- 1995-12-11 CN CN2006101006621A patent/CN1912141B/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1995-12-11 CN CNA031549489A patent/CN1510137A/en active Pending
- 1995-12-11 KR KR1020067017679A patent/KR20060099543A/en not_active Application Discontinuation
- 1995-12-11 SG SG200607028-8A patent/SG165157A1/en unknown
- 1995-12-11 PT PT98201907T patent/PT889120E/en unknown
- 1995-12-11 KR KR1020037017326A patent/KR100551104B1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1995-12-11 EP EP98201907A patent/EP0889120B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1995-12-11 AU AU41219/96A patent/AU711524C/en not_active Ceased
- 1995-12-11 CA CA2623339A patent/CA2623339C/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1995-12-11 CN CNB951975757A patent/CN1160469C/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1995-12-11 AT AT95939362T patent/ATE171477T1/en active
- 1995-12-11 SG SG200301515A patent/SG119177A1/en unknown
- 1995-12-11 RU RU2003135645/13A patent/RU2370541C2/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1995-12-11 DK DK98201907T patent/DK0889120T3/en active
- 1995-12-11 NZ NZ296581A patent/NZ296581A/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1995-12-11 HU HU9701765A patent/HUT76975A/en not_active Application Discontinuation
- 1995-12-11 KR KR1019970703866A patent/KR100445103B1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1995-12-11 DE DE69505011T patent/DE69505011T2/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1995-12-11 DK DK95939362T patent/DK0796341T3/en active
- 1995-12-11 KR KR1020057005514A patent/KR20050052665A/en not_active Application Discontinuation
- 1995-12-11 EP EP95939362A patent/EP0796341B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1995-12-11 NZ NZ502020A patent/NZ502020A/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1995-12-11 DE DE0889120T patent/DE889120T1/en active Pending
- 1995-12-11 NZ NZ511170A patent/NZ511170A/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1995-12-11 EP EP01205191A patent/EP1285960A3/en not_active Withdrawn
-
1997
- 1997-05-30 NO NO19972468A patent/NO320492B1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1997-06-06 FI FI972424A patent/FI121601B/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1997-06-09 US US08/871,355 patent/US6015669A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
1998
- 1998-09-15 HK HK98110640A patent/HK1009833A1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1998-12-01 US US09/201,945 patent/US6342215B1/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2000
- 2000-11-16 US US09/714,602 patent/US6984490B1/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2002
- 2002-08-02 JP JP2002226740A patent/JP4220195B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2004
- 2004-06-01 NO NO20042249A patent/NO327361B1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2004-08-09 HK HK07108847.1A patent/HK1100782A1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
-
2005
- 2005-08-09 US US11/199,853 patent/US20060216309A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2007
- 2007-08-17 US US11/840,903 patent/US7842290B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2008
- 2008-05-21 JP JP2008133664A patent/JP2009005688A/en active Pending
-
2010
- 2010-09-27 US US12/890,892 patent/US20110229515A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4550081A (en) * | 1980-05-19 | 1985-10-29 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Jr. University | Non-reverting salmonella |
US4837151A (en) * | 1980-05-19 | 1989-06-06 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University, Stanford University | Live vaccines comprising two mutations and foreign antigen |
US5397697A (en) * | 1989-01-10 | 1995-03-14 | Ciba-Geigy Corporation | Identification of plant-responsive genes of bacteria |
US5527674A (en) * | 1991-10-07 | 1996-06-18 | Idaho Research Foundation, Inc. | Genetic construct for selection of homologous recombinants on a single selective medium |
US5876931A (en) * | 1994-12-09 | 1999-03-02 | Rpms Technology Limited | Identification of genes |
US5700683A (en) * | 1995-02-17 | 1997-12-23 | Pathogenesis Corporation | Virulence-attenuating genetic deletions deleted from mycobacterium BCG |
US5700928A (en) * | 1995-10-16 | 1997-12-23 | Smithkline Beecham, P.L.C. | Polynucleotide encoding saliva binding protein |
Cited By (29)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20080175866A1 (en) * | 1994-12-09 | 2008-07-24 | Imperial College Innovations Limited | Identification of Genes |
US7842290B2 (en) | 1994-12-09 | 2010-11-30 | Emergent Product Development Uk Limited | Identification of genes |
US20110229515A1 (en) * | 1994-12-09 | 2011-09-22 | Emergent Product Development Uk Limited | Identification of genes |
US20040203039A1 (en) * | 1998-09-04 | 2004-10-14 | Microscience Limited | Attenuated salmonella SP12 mutants as antigen carriers |
US20080075739A1 (en) * | 1998-09-04 | 2008-03-27 | Microscience Limited | Attenuated Salmonella SP12 Mutants as Antigen Carriers |
US7700104B2 (en) | 1998-09-04 | 2010-04-20 | Emergent Product Development Uk Limited | Attenuated Salmonella SP12 mutants as antigen carriers |
US7955600B2 (en) | 1998-09-04 | 2011-06-07 | Emergent Product Development Uk Limited | Attenuated salmonella SP12 mutants as antigen carriers |
US20080274139A1 (en) * | 1999-05-10 | 2008-11-06 | Robert Graham Feldman | Attenuated microorganisms for the treatment of infection |
US7887816B2 (en) | 1999-05-10 | 2011-02-15 | Emergent Product Development Uk Limited | Attenuated microorganisms for the treatment of infection |
US8703153B2 (en) | 2008-06-16 | 2014-04-22 | Prokarium Ltd. | Salmonella vectored vaccines against Chlamydia and methods of use |
US11505795B2 (en) | 2008-09-12 | 2022-11-22 | University Of Washington | Error detection in sequence tag directed sequencing reads |
US10577601B2 (en) | 2008-09-12 | 2020-03-03 | University Of Washington | Error detection in sequence tag directed subassemblies of short sequencing reads |
US11299730B2 (en) | 2011-02-02 | 2022-04-12 | University Of Washington Through Its Center For Commercialization | Massively parallel contiguity mapping |
US11999951B2 (en) | 2011-02-02 | 2024-06-04 | University Of Washington Through Its Center For Commercialization | Massively parallel contiguity mapping |
US10457936B2 (en) | 2011-02-02 | 2019-10-29 | University Of Washington Through Its Center For Commercialization | Massively parallel contiguity mapping |
US8829171B2 (en) | 2011-02-10 | 2014-09-09 | Illumina, Inc. | Linking sequence reads using paired code tags |
US9074251B2 (en) * | 2011-02-10 | 2015-07-07 | Illumina, Inc. | Linking sequence reads using paired code tags |
US20120208724A1 (en) * | 2011-02-10 | 2012-08-16 | Steemers Frank J | Linking sequence reads using paired code tags |
US10246705B2 (en) | 2011-02-10 | 2019-04-02 | Ilumina, Inc. | Linking sequence reads using paired code tags |
US11993772B2 (en) | 2011-02-10 | 2024-05-28 | Illumina, Inc. | Linking sequence reads using paired code tags |
US10041066B2 (en) | 2013-01-09 | 2018-08-07 | Illumina Cambridge Limited | Sample preparation on a solid support |
US10988760B2 (en) | 2013-01-09 | 2021-04-27 | Illumina Cambridge Limited | Sample preparation on a solid support |
US11970695B2 (en) | 2013-01-09 | 2024-04-30 | Illumina Cambridge Limited | Sample preparation on a solid support |
US9683230B2 (en) | 2013-01-09 | 2017-06-20 | Illumina Cambridge Limited | Sample preparation on a solid support |
US11319534B2 (en) | 2013-03-13 | 2022-05-03 | Illumina, Inc. | Methods and compositions for nucleic acid sequencing |
US10557133B2 (en) | 2013-03-13 | 2020-02-11 | Illumina, Inc. | Methods and compositions for nucleic acid sequencing |
US11149310B2 (en) | 2013-12-20 | 2021-10-19 | Illumina, Inc. | Preserving genomic connectivity information in fragmented genomic DNA samples |
US10246746B2 (en) | 2013-12-20 | 2019-04-02 | Illumina, Inc. | Preserving genomic connectivity information in fragmented genomic DNA samples |
US11873480B2 (en) | 2014-10-17 | 2024-01-16 | Illumina Cambridge Limited | Contiguity preserving transposition |
Also Published As
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US7842290B2 (en) | Identification of genes | |
TWI328035B (en) | Anti-bacterial vaccine compositions | |
EP1129196B1 (en) | Virulence genes and proteins, and their use | |
AU758791B2 (en) | Identification of genes | |
RU2241758C2 (en) | Method for assay of microorganism with reduced adaptation to specific environment, dna (variants), virulence gene, polypeptide, method for assay of compound, antisense nucleic acid, method for host treatment and pharmaceutical composition | |
US20030059442A1 (en) | Attenuated microorganisms for the treatment of infection |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: IMPERIAL COLLEGE INNOVATIONS LIMITED, UNITED KINGD Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:IMPERIAL COLLEGE INNOVATIONS LIMITED;REEL/FRAME:017063/0874 Effective date: 20010711 Owner name: RPMS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED, UNITED KINGDOM Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:HOLDEN, DAVID WILLIAM;REEL/FRAME:017063/0119 Effective date: 19960605 Owner name: MICROSCIENCE LIMITED, UNITED KINGDOM Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:IMPERIAL COLLEGE INNOVATIONS LIMITED;REEL/FRAME:017063/0874 Effective date: 20010711 Owner name: IMPERIAL COLLEGE INNOVATIONS LIMITED, UNITED KINGD Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:RPMS TECHNOLOGY LIMITED;REEL/FRAME:017063/0154 Effective date: 19980624 |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |